Перевод: с греческого на английский

с английского на греческий

before+you

  • 61 εἰ

    εἰ, [dialect] Att.-[dialect] Ion. and Arc. (for εἰκ, v. infr. 11 ad init.), = [dialect] Dor. and [dialect] Aeol. αἰ, αἰκ (q. v.), Cypr.
    A

    ἤ Inscr.Cypr.135.10

     H., both εἰ and αἰ in [dialect] Ep.:— Particle used interjectionally with imper. and to express a wish, but usu. either in conditions, if, or in indirect questions, whether. In the former use its regular negative is μή; in the latter, οὐ.
    A INTERJECTIONALLY, in Hom., come now! c. imper.,

    εἰ δὲ.. ἄκουσον Il.9.262

    ; εἰ δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ φευγόντων ib.46; most freq. with ἄγε (q. v.), 1.302, al.
    2 in wishes, c. opt.,

    ἀλλ' εἴ τις.. καλέσειεν 10.111

    , cf. 24.74; so later,

    εἴ μοι ξυνείη μοῖρα S.OT 863

     (lyr.);

    εἴ μοι γένοιτο φθόγγος ἐν βραχίοσιν E.Hec. 836

    : more freq. folld. by

    γάρ, αἲ γὰρ δὴ οὕτως εἴη Il.4.189

    , al.;

    εἰ γὰρ γενοίμην ἀντὶ σοῦ νεκρός E.Hipp. 1410

    ;

    εἰ γὰρ γένοιτο X.Cyr.6.1.38

    ;

    εἰ γὰρ ἐν τούτῳ εἴη Pl.Prt. 310d

    ; of unattained wishes, in Hom. only c. opt.,

    εἰ γὰρ ἐγὼν.. Διὸς πάϊς αἰγιόχοιο εἴην Il.13.825

    ;

    Ζεῦ πάτερ, αἰ γὰρ ἐμὸς πόσις εἴη Alcm.29

    ; later with past tenses of ind.,

    εἰ γάρ μ' ὑπὸ γῆν.. ἧκεν A.Pr. 152

     (anap.); εἰ γὰρ τοσαύτην δύναμιν εἶχον ὥστε .. E.Alc. 1072: twice in Od. c. inf. (cf. the use of inf. in commands),

    αἰ γὰρ τοῖος ἐὼν.. ἐμὸς γαμβρὸς καλέεσθαι 7.311

    , cf. 24.376.
    b εἴθε, [dialect] Ep. αἴθε, is freq. used in wishes in the above constructions,

    εἴθε οἱ αὐτῷ Ζεὺς ἀγαθὸν τελέσειεν 2.33

    ;

    εἴθ' ὣς ἡβώοιμι Il.7.157

    ;

    ἰὼ γᾶ, εἴθ' ἔμ' ἐδέξω A.Ag. 1537

     (lyr.);

    εἴθε σοι, ὦ Περίκλεις, τότε συνεγενόμην X.Mem.1.2.46

    : later c. inf.,

    γαίης χθαμαλωτέρη εἴθε.. κεῖσθαι AP9.284

     (Crin.).
    c εἰ γάρ, εἴθε are also used with ὤφελον ([dialect] Ep. ὤφελλον), of past unattained wishes,

    αἴθ' ὤφελλες στρατοῦ ἄλλου σημαίνειν Il.14.84

    ; εἰ γὰρ ὤφελον [κατιδεῖν] Pl.R. 432c.
    d folld. by a clause expressing a consequence of the fulfilment of the wish, αἰ γὰρ τοῦτο.. ἔπος τετελεσμένον εἴη· τῷ κε τάχα γνοίης .. Od. 15.536, cf. 17.496, al.; sts. hard to distinguish from εἰ in conditions (which may be derived from this use),

    εἴ μοί τι πίθοιο, τό κεν πολὺ κέρδιον εἴη Il.7.28

    .
    B IN CONDITIONS, if:
    I with INDIC.,
    1 with all tenses (for [tense] fut., v. infr. 2), to state a condition, with nothing implied as to its fulfilment, εἰ δ' οὕτω τοῦτ' ἐστίν, ἐμοὶ μέλλει φίλον εἶναι but if this is so, it will be.., Il.1.564: any form of the Verb may stand in apodosi,

    εἰ θεοί τι δρῶσιν αἰσχρόν, οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοί E.Fr.292.7

    ;

    εἰ δοκεῖ, πλέωμεν S.Ph. 526

    ;

    εἰ Φαῖδρον ἀγνοῶ, καὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐπιλέλησμαι Pl.Phdr. 228a

    ;

    κάκιστ' ἀπολοίμην, Ξανθίαν εἰ μὴ φιλῶ Ar.Ra. 579

    , cf. Od.17.475;

    εἰ θεοῦ ἦν, οὐκ ἦν αἰσχροκερδής· εἰ δ' αἰσχροκερδής, οὐκ ἦν θεοῦ Pl.R. 408c

    ;

    εἰ ταῦτα λέγων διαφθείρω τοὺς νέους, ταῦτ' ἂν εἴη βλαβερά Id.Ap. 30b

    , cf. 25b; εἰ οὗτοι ὀρθῶς ἀπέστησαν, ὑμεῖς ἂν οὐ χρεὼν ἄρχοιτε if these were right in their revolt, (it would follow that) you rule when you have no right, Th.3.40.
    b to express a general condition, if ever, whenever, sts. with [tense] pres.,

    εἴ τις δύο ἢ καὶ πλείους τις ἡμέρας λογίζεται, μάταιός ἐστιν S.Tr. 943

    : with [tense] impf.,

    εἴ τίς τι ἠρώτα ἀπεκρίνοντο Th.7.10

    : rarely with [tense] aor., D.S.31.26.1, S.E.P.1.84; cf. 111.2.
    2 with [tense] fut. (much less freq. than ἐάν c. subj.), either to express a future supposition emphatically,

    εἰ φθάσομεν τοὺς πολεμίους κατακαίνοντες οὐδεὶς ἡμῶν ἀποθανεῖται X.Cyr.7.1.19

    ;

    εἰ μὴ βοηθήσετε οὐ περιέσται τἀκεῖ Th.6.91

    ; εἰ αὕτη ἡ πόλις ληφθήσεται, ἔχεται ἡ πᾶσα Σικελία ibid.; in threats or warnings,

    εἰ μὴ καθέξεις γλῶσσαν ἔσται σοι κακά E.Fr.5

    ;

    εἰ τιμωρήσεις Πατρόκλῳ, αὐτὸς ἀποθανῇ Pl.Ap. 28c

    , cf. D.28.21: or,
    b to express a present intention or expectation, αἶρε πλῆκτρον εἰ μαχεῖ if you mean to fight, Ar.Av. 759;

    ἐγὼ μὲν οὐκ ἀνήρ.. εἰ ταῦτ' ἀνατεὶ τῇδε κείσεται κράτη S.Ant. 485

    , cf. Il.1.61, E.Hec. 863.
    3 with historical tenses, implying that the condition is or was unfulfilled.
    a with [tense] impf., referring to present time or to continued or repeated action in past time (in Hom. always the latter, Il.24.715, al.): ταῦτα οὐκ ἂν ἐδύναντο ποιεῖν, εἰ μὴ διαίτῃ μετρίᾳ ἐχρῶντο they would not be able to do this (as they do), if they did not live an abstemious life, X.Cyr.1.2.16, cf. Pl.R. 489b; οὐκ ἂν νήσων ἐκράτει, εἰ μή τι καὶ ναυτικὸν εἶχεν he ([place name] Agamemnon) would not have been master of islands, if he had not had also some naval force, Th.1.9;

    αἰ δ' ἦχες ἔσλων ἴμερον ἢ κάλων.. αἴδως κεν.. ἦχεν Sapph.28

    ; εἰ ἦσαν ἄνδρες ἀγαθοὶ.. οὐκ ἄν ποτε ταῦτα ἔπασχον if they had been good men, they would never have suffered as they did, Pl.Grg. 516e, cf. X.Mem.1.1.5; εἰ γὰρ ἐγὼ τάδε ᾔδἐ.. οὐκ ἂν ὑπεξέφυγε if I had known this.., Il.8.366.
    b with [tense] aor. referring to past time,

    εἰ μὴ ἔφυσε θεὸς μέλι.. ἔφασκον γλύσσονα σῦκα πέλεσθαι Xenoph.38

    ; εἰ μὴ ὑμεῖς ἤλθετε, ἐπορευόμεθα ἂν ἐπὶ βασιλέα had you not come, we should be on our way.., X.An.2.1.4;

    καὶ ἴσως ἂν ἀπέθανον, εἰ μὴ ἡ ἀρχὴ διὰ ταχέων κατελύθη Pl.Ap. 32d

    , cf. Il.5.680, Od.4.364, D.4.5, 27.63: with [tense] plpf. in apodosi,

    εἰ τριάκοντα μόναι μετέπεσον τῶν ψήφων, ἀπεπεφεύγη ἄν Pl. Ap. 36a

    .
    c rarely with [tense] plpf. referring to action finished in past or present time, λοιπὸν δ' ἂν ἦν ἡμῖν ἔτι περὶ τῆς πόλεως διαλεχθῆναι, εἰ μὴ προτέρα τῶν ἄλλων τὴν εἰρήνην ἐπεποίητο if she had not (as she has done) made peace before the rest, Isoc.5.56, cf. Pl.Ti. 21c.
    II with SUBJ., εἰ is regularly joined with ἄν ([dialect] Ep. κε, κεν), cf. ἐάν: Arc. εἰκαν in Tegean Inscrr. of iv B. C. (IG5(2).3.16, 31, 6.2, SIG306.34) should be understood as εἰκ ἄν (εἰ: εἰκ = οὐ: οὐκ), since εἰ δ' ἄν is also found in IG5(2).3.2, 6.45, and εἰκ alone, ib.3.21; but ἄν ([etym.] κε, κεν) are freq. absent in Hom. as Od.5.221, 14.373 (and cf. infr. 2), and Lyr., Pi. (who never uses εἰ with ἄν or κε ([etym.] ν)) P.4.266, al.; in dialects,

    αἰ δείλητ' ἀγχωρεῖν IG9(1).334.6

     ([dialect] Locr., v B. C.), cf. Foed.[dialect] Dor. ap. Th.5.79; rarely in Hdt.,

    εἰ μὴ ἀναβῇ 2.13

    ; occasionally in Trag., A.Eu. 234, S.OT 198 (lyr.), etc.; very rarely in [dialect] Att. Prose,

    εἰ ξυστῶσιν αἱ πόλεις Th.6.21

    ;

    εἴ τι που ἄλσος ἢ τέμενος ἀφειμένον ᾖ Pl.Lg. 761c

    : in later Prose,

    εἴ τις θελήσῃ Apoc.11.5

    ;

    εἰ φονεύῃ Plot.2.9.9

    , cf. Procl. Inst.26.
    1 when the apodosis is [tense] fut., to express a future condition more distinctly and vividly than εἰ c. opt., but less so than εἰ c. [tense] fut. ind. (supr. 1.2a); εἰ δέ κεν ὣς ἕρξῃς καί τοι πείθωνται Ἀχαιοί, γνώσῃ ἔπειθ' .. if thou do thus.., thou shalt know, Il.2.364, cf. 1.128, 3.281, Od.17.549;

    ἂν δέ τις ἀνθιστῆται, σὺν ὑμῖν πειρασόμεθα χειροῦσθαι X. An.7.3.11

    ; ἂν μὴ νῦν ἐθέλωμεν ἐκεῖ πολεμεῖν αὐτῷ, ἐνθάδ' ἴσως ἀναγκασθησόμεθα τοῦτο ποιεῖν if we be not now willing, D.4.50, cf. X.Cyr. 5.3.27: folld. by imper., ἢν εἰρήνης δοκῆτε δεῖσθαι, ἄνευ ὅπλων ἥκετε ib.3.2.13, cf. 5.4.30.
    2 when the apodosis is present, denoting customary or repeated action, to express a general condition, if ever, ἤν ποτε δασμὸς ἵκηται, σοὶ τὸ γέρας πολὺ μεῖζον (sc. ἐστί) whenever a division comes, your prize is (always) greater, Il.1.166; ἢν ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνῄσκειν if death come near, E.Alc. 671; with ἄν omitted,

    εἴ περ γάρ τε χόλον.. καταπέψῃ ἀλλά.. ἔχει κότον Il.1.81

    .
    b with Rhet. present in apodosis, ἐὰν μὴ οἱ φιλόσοφοι βασιλεύσωσιν, οὐκ ἔστι κακῶν παῦλα there is (i.e. can be, will be) no rest.., Pl.R. 473d.
    III with OPTATIVE (never with ἄν in early Gr., later ἐάν c. opt., Dam.Pr. 114, al.),
    1 to express a future condition less definitely than ἐάν c. subj., usu. with opt. with ἄν in apod., ἦ κεν γηθήσαι Πρίαμος Πριάμοιό τε παῖδες.. εἰ σφῶιν τάδε πάντα πυθοίατο μαρναμένοιιν surely they would exult, if they should hear.., Il.1.255, cf. 7.28, Od.3.223;

    εἴης φορητὸς οὐκ ἄν, εἰ πράσσοις καλῶς A.Pr. 979

    ;

    οὐδὲ γὰρ ἄν με ἐπαινοίη, εἰ ἐξελαύνοιμι τοὺς εὐεργέτας X.An.7.7.11

    ;

    οἶκος δ' αὐτός, εἰ φθογγὴν λάβοι, σαφέστατ' ἂν λέξειεν A.Ag.37

    , etc.: [tense] fut. opt. is f.l. in Pl.Tht. 164a: with [tense] pres. ind. in apod., Xenoph.34.3, Democr.253: with [tense] fut.ind., Meliss.5.
    b in Hom.sts. with [tense] pres. opt., to express an unfulfilled present condition, εἰ μὲν νῦν ἐπὶ ἄλλῳ ἀεθλεύοιμεν, ἦ τ' ἂν ἐγὼ τὰ πρῶτα φεροίμην if we were now contending, etc., Il.23.274: rarely in Trag., εἰ μὴ κνίζοι ( = εἰ μὴ ἔκνιζε) E.Med. 568; also

    εἰ ἀναγκαῖον εἴη ἀδικεῖν ἢ ἀδικεῖσθαι, ἑλοίμην ἂν μᾶλλον ἀδικεῖσθαι Pl.Grg. 469c

    .
    2 when the apodosis is past, denoting customary or repeated action, to express a general condition in past time (corresponding to use of subj. in present time, supr. 11.2); once in Hom.,

    εἴ τίς με.. ἐνίπτοι, ἀλλὰ σὺ τόν γ'.. κατέρυκες Il.24.768

    ; εἰ δέ τινας θορυβουμένους αἴσθοιτο.., κατασβεννύναι τὴν ταραχὴν ἐπειρᾶτο if he should see ( whenever he saw) any troops in confusion, he (always) tried, X.Cyr.5.3.55, cf. An.4.5.13, Mem.4.2.40; εἴ τις ἀντείποι, εὐθὺς ἐτεθνήκει if any one made objection, he was a dead man at once, Th. 8.66;

    ἀλλ' εἴ τι μὴ φέροιμεν, ὤτρυνεν φέρειν E.Alc. 755

    . For εἰ c. ind. in this sense v. supr. 1.1: ind. and opt. are found in same sentence,

    ἐμίσει, οὐκ εἴ τις κακῶς πάσχων ἠμύνετο, ἀλλ' εἴ τις εὐεργετούμενος ἀχάριστος φαίνοιτο X.Ages.11.3

    .
    3 in oratio obliqua after past tenses, representing ἐάν c. subj. or εἰ with a primary (never an historical) tense of the ind. in oratio recta, ἐλογίζοντο ὡς, εἰ μὴ μάχοιντο, ἀποστήσοιντο αἱ πόλεις (representing ἐὰν μὴ μαχώμεθα, ἀποστήσονται) X.HG6.4.6, cf. D.21.104, X.HG5.2.2; ἔλεγεν ὅτι, εἰ βλαβερὰ πεπραχὼς εἴη, δίκαιος εἴη ζημιοῦσθαι (representing εἰ βλαβερὰ πέπραχε, δίκαιός ἐστι) ib.32, cf. An.6.6.25; εἰ δέ τινα φεύγοντα λήψοιτο, προηγόρευεν ὅτι ὡς πολεμίψ χρήσοιτο (representing εἴ τινα λήψομαι, χρήσομαι) Id.Cyr.3.1.3; also, where oratio obliqua is implied in the leading clause, οὐκ ἦν τοῦ πολέμου πέρας Φιλίππῳ, εἰ μὴ Θηβαίους.. ἐχθροὺς ποιήσειε τῇ πόλει, i.e. Philip thought there would be no end to the war, unless he should make.. (his thought having been ἐὰν μὴ ποιήσω), D.18.145;

    ἐβούλοντο γὰρ σφίσιν, εἴ τινα λάβοιεν, ὑπάρχειν ἀντὶ τῶν ἔνδον, ἢν ἄρα τύχωσί τινες ἐζωγρημένοι Th.2.5

    .
    4 c. opt. with ἄν, only when the clause serves as apodosis as well as protasis, cf. Pl.Prt. 329b, D.4.18, X.Mem.1.5.3 (v.

    ἄν A. 111

    . d).
    IV c. INF., in oratio obliqua, only in Hdt.,

    εἰ γὰρ δὴ δεῖν πάντως περιθεῖναι ἄλλῳ τέῳ τὴν βασιληΐην, [ἔφη] δικαιότερον εἶναι κτλ. 1.129

    ;

    εἰ εἶναι τοῦτο μὴ φίλον 2.64

    , cf. 172, 3.105, 108.
    V after Verbs denoting wonder, delight, indignation, disappointment, contentment, and similar emotions, εἰ c. ind. is used instead of ὅτι, to express the object of the feeling in a hypothetical form, θαυμάζω εἰ μηδεὶς ὑμῶν μήτ' ἐνθυμεῖται μήτ' ὀργίζεται, ὁρῶν .. I wonder that no one of you is either concerned or angry when he sees.., D.4.43;

    οὐκ ἀγαπᾷ εἰ μὴ δίκην δέδωκεν, ἀλλ' εἰ μὴ καὶ χρυσῷ στεφάνῳ στεφανωθήσεται ἀγανακτεῖ Aeschin.3.147

    : after past tenses,

    ἐθαύμασε δ' εἰ μὴ φανερόν ἐστιν X.Mem.1.1.13

    ;

    δεινὸν εἰσῄει, εἰ μὴ.. δόξει D.19.33

    ;

    ἐθαύμαζον εἴ τι ἕξει τις χρήσασθαι τῷ λόγῳ Pl.Phd. 95a

    ;

    οὐδὲ ᾐσχύνθη εἰ.. ἐπάγει D.21.105

    : in oratio obliqua (expressed or implied) c. opt., ἐπεῖπεν ὡς δεινὸν (sc. εἴη)

    εἰ.. μεγαλόψυχος γένοιτο Aeschin.2.157

    ;

    ᾤκτιρον εἰ ἁλώσοιντο X.An.1.4.7

    ; ἐθαύμαζε δ' εἴ τις ἀρετὴν ἐπαγγελλόμενος ἀργύριον πράττοιτο he wondered that any one should demand money, Id.Mem.1.2.7; ἔχαιρον ἀγαπῶν εἴ τις ἐάσοι I rejoiced, being content if any one should let it pass, Pl.R. 450a:—in this use the neg. οὐ is also found,

    ἀγανακτῶ εἰ ὁ Φίλιππος ἁρπάζων οὐ λυπεῖ D.8.55

    ;

    δεινὸν ἂν εἴη εἰ οἱ ἐκείνων ξύμμαχοι οὐκ ἀπεροῦσιν Th.1.121

    ;

    τέρας λέγεις, εἰ οὐκ ἂν δύναιντο λαθεῖν Pl.Men. 91d

    , etc.
    VI in citing a fact as a ground of argument or appeal, as surely as, since, εἴ ποτ' ἔην γε if there was [as there was], i.e. as sure as there was such an one, Il.3.180, al.;

    εἰ τότε κοῦρος ἔα, νῦν αὖτέ με γῆρας ὀπάζει 4.321

    ; πολλοὺς γὰρ οἶκε εἶναι εὐπετέστερον διαβάλλειν ἢ ἕνα, εἰ Κλεομένεα μὲν μοῦνον οὐκ οἷός τε ἐγένετο διαβαλεῖν, τρεῖς δὲ μυριάδας Ἀθηναίων ἐποίησε τοῦτο it seems easier to deceive many than one, if (as was the fact, i.e. since) he was not able.., Hdt.5.97, cf. 1.60,al.
    VII ELLIPTICAL CONSTRUCTIONS:
    1 with apodosis implied in the context, εἰ having the force of in case, supposing that, πρὸς τὴν πόλιν, εἰ ἐπιβοηθοῖεν, ἐχώρουν they marched towards the city [so as to meet the citizens], in case they should rush out, Th.6.100; ἱκέται πρὸς σὲ δεῦρ' ἀφίγμεθα, εἴ τινα πόλιν φράσειας ἡμῖν εὔερον we have come hither to you, in case you should tell us of some fleecy city (i.e. that we might hear of it), Ar.Av. 120; παρέζεο καὶ λαβὲ γούνων, αἴ κέν πως ἐθέλῃσιν ἐπὶ Τρώεσσιν ἀρῆξαι sit by him and grasp his knees [so as to persuade him], in case he be willing to help the Trojans, Il.1.408, cf. 66, Od.1.94, 3.92; ἄκουσον καὶ ἐμοῦ, ἐάν σοι ἔτι ταὐτὰ δοκῇ hear me also [that you may assent], in case the same opinion please you, Pl.R. 358b; ἰδὲ δή, ἐάν σοι ὅπερ ἐμοὶ συνδοκῇ look now, in case you approve what I do, ib. 434a.
    2 with apodosis suppressed for rhetorical reasons, εἴ περ γάρ κ' ἐθέλῃσιν Ὀλύμπιος.. στυφελίξαι if he wish to thrust him away, [he will do so], Il.1.580; εἰ μὲν δώσουσι γέρας—· εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they shall give me a prize, [well and good]; but if they give not, then I will take one for myself, 1.135, cf. 6.150, Ar.Pl. 468; καὶ ἢν μὲν ξυμβῇ ἡ πεῖρα—· εἰ δὲ μή .. and if the attempt succeed, [well]; otherwise.., Th.3.3, cf. Pl.Prt. 325d.
    3 with the Verb of the protasis omitted, chiefly in the following expressions:
    a εἰ μή except,

    οὐδὲν ἄλλο σιτέονται, εἰ μὴ ἰχθῦς μοῦνον Hdt. 1.200

    ; μὰ τὼ θεώ, εἰ μὴ Κρίτυλλά γ' [εἰμί]—nay, if I'm not Critylla! i.e. I am, Ar.Th. 898; εἰ μὴ ὅσον except only,

    ἐγὼ μέν μιν οὐκ εἶδον, εἰ μὴ ὅσον γραφῇ Hdt.2.73

    , cf. 1.45, 2.20;

    εἰ μὴ εἰ Th.1.17

    , Pl.Grg. 480b, etc.; εἰ μή τι οὖν, ἀλλὰ σμικρόν γέ μοι τῆς ἀρχῆς χάλασον if nothing else, yet.., Id.Men. 86e; ironical,

    εἰ μὴ ἄρα ἡ τῆς ἀρετῆς ἐπιμέλεια διαφθορά ἐστιν X.Mem.1.2.8

    ;

    εἰ μή πέρ γε τὸν ὑοσκύαμον χρήματα εἶναι φήσομεν Id.Oec.1.13

    .
    b εἰ δὲ μή but if not, i.e. otherwise,

    προηγόρευε τοῖς Λαμψακηνοῖσι μετιέναι Μιλτιάδεα, εἰ δὲ μή, σφέας πίτυος τρόπον ἀπείλεε ἐκτρίψειν Hdt.6.37

    , cf. 56; after μάλιστα μέν, Th.1.32,35, etc.:—after a preceding neg., μὴ τύπτ'· εἰ δὲ μή, σαυτόν ποτ' αἰτιάσει don't beat me; otherwise, you will have yourself to blame, Ar.Nu. 1433;

    ὦ Κῦρε, μὴ οὕτω λέγε· εἰ δὲ μή, οὐ θαρροῦντά με ἕξεις X.Cyr.3.1.35

    ;

    οὔτ' ἐν τῷ ὕδατι τὰ ὅπλα ἦν ἔχειν· εἰ δὲ μή Id.An.4.3.6

    , cf. Th.1.28, 131, Pl.Phd. 91c.
    c εἰ δέ sts. stands for

    εἰ δὲ μή, εἰ μὲν βούλεται, ἑψέτω· εἰ δ', ὅτι βούλεται, τοῦτο ποιείτω Pl.Euthd. 285c

    , cf. Smp. 212c;

    εἰ δ' οὖν S.Ant. 722

    ;

    εἰ δ' οὕτως Arist.EN 1094a24

    ; εἰ δὲ τοῦτο and if so, Str.2.1.29.
    d εἰ γάρ for if so, Id.7.3.6.
    e εἴ τις if any, i. e. as much as or more than any,

    τῶν γε νῦν αἴ τις ἐπιχθονίων, ὀρθῶς B.5.5

    ;

    ὄτλον ἄλγιστον ἔσχον, εἴ τις Αἰτωλὶς γυνή S.Tr.8

    , cf. OC 734; εἴ τις ἄλλος, siquis alius, E.Andr.6, etc.;

    εἴ τινες καὶ ἄλλοι Hdt.3.2

    , etc.;

    εἴπερ τις ἄλλος Pl.R. 501d

    ; also κατ' εἰ δέ τινα τρόπον in any way, IG 5(2).6.27 ([place name] Tegea).
    f εἴ ποτε or εἴπερ ποτέ now if ever,

    ἡμῖν δὲ καλῶς, εἴπερ ποτέ, ἔχει.. ἡ ξυναλλαγή Th.4.20

    , cf. Ar.Eq. 594;

    αἴ ποτα κἄλλοτα Alc.Supp.7.11

    , cf. X.An.6.4.12, etc.; but in prayers,

    εἴ ποτέ τοι ἐπὶ νηὸν ἔρεψα.. τόδε μοι κρήηνον ἐέλδωρ Il.1.39

    .
    g εἴ ποθεν (sc. δυνατόν ἐστι) if from any quarter, i.e. from some quarter or other, S.Ph. 1204 (lyr.); so εἴ ποθι somewhere, anywhere, Id.Aj. 885 (lyr.);

    εἴ που Od.4.193

    .
    h εἴ πως ib. 388, X.An.2.3.11: in an elliptical sentence (cf. VII. 1),

    πρέσβεις πέμψαντες, εἴ πως πείσειαν Th.1.58

    .
    VIII with other PARTICLES:
    2 for ὡς εἰ, ὡς εἴ τε, ὥσπερ εἰ, etc., v. ὡς and ὥσπερ.
    3 for εἰ ἄρα, v. ἄρα; for εἰ δή, εἴπερ, v. εἰ δή, εἴπερ; for εἴ γε, v. γέ.
    IX in neg. oaths, = Hebr. im, LXXPs.94(95).11, Ev.Marc.8.12, al.
    C IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS, whether, folld. by the ind., subj., or opt., according to the principles of oratio obliqua:
    1 with IND. after primary tenses, representing the same tense in the direct question, σάφα δ' οὐκ οἶδ' εἰ θεός ἐστιν whether he is a god, Il.5.183;

    εἰ ξυμπονήσεις.. σκόπει S.Ant.41

    .
    2 with SUBJ. after primary tenses, representing a dubitative subj. in the direct question, τὰ ἐκπώματα οὐκ οἶδ' εἰ Χρυσάντᾳ τουτῳῒ δῶ whether I should give them, X.Cyr.8.4.16: sts. elliptical,

    ἐς τὰ χρηστήρια ἔπεμπε, εἰ στρατεύηται ἐπὶ τοὺς Πέρσας Hdt.1.75

    .
    3 OPT. after past tenses, representing either of the two previous constructions in the direct question, ἤρετο εἴ τις ἐμοῦ εἴη σοφώτερος he asked whether any one was wiser than I (direct ἔστι τις σοφώτερος;), Pl.Ap. 21a;

    ἐπεκηρυκεύετο Πεισιστράτῳ, εἰ βούλοιτό οἱ τὴν θυγατέρα ἔχειν γυναῖκα Hdt.1.60

    : rarely [tense] aor. opt. for the [tense] aor. ind., ἠρώτων αὐτὸν εἰ ἀναπλεύσειεν I asked him whether he had set sail (direct ἀνέπλευσας;), D.50.55: but [tense] aor. opt. usually represents [tense] aor. subj., τὸν θεὸν ἐπήροντο εἰ παραδοῖεν Κορινθίοις τὴν πόλιν.. καὶ τιμωρίαν τινὰ πειρῷντ' ἀπ' αὐτῶν ποιεῖσθαι they asked whether they should deliver their city to the Corinthians, and should try.., Th.1.25:—in both constructions the ind. or subj. may be retained, ψῆφον ἐβούλοντο ἐπαγαγεῖν εἰ χρὴ πολεμεῖν ib. 119; ἐβουλεύοντο εἴτε κατακαύσωσιν.. εἴτε τι ἄλλο χρήσωνται whether they should burn them or should dispose of them in some other way, Id.2.4; ἀνακοινοῦσθαι αὐτὸν αὑτῷ εἰ δῷ ἐπιψηφίσαι τοῖς προέδροις [he said that] he consulted him whether he should give.., Aeschin.2.68.
    4 with OPT. and ἄν when this was the form of the direct question, ἠρώτων εἰ δοῖεν ἂν τούτων τὰ πιστά they asked whether they would give (direct δοιήτε ἄν;), X.An.4.8.7.
    5 the NEG. used with εἰ in indirect questions is οὐ, when οὐ would be used in the direct question, ἐνετέλλετο.. εἰρωτᾶν εἰ οὔ τι ἐπαισχύνεται whether he is not ashamed, Hdt.1.90, etc.; but if μή would be required in the direct form, it is retained in the indirect, οὐ τοῦτο ἐρωτῶ, ἀλλ' εἰ τοῦ μὲν δικαίου μὴ ἀξιοῖ πλέον ἔχειν μηδὲ βούλεται ὁ δίκαιος, τοῦ δὲ ἀδίκου (the direct question would be μὴ ἀξιοῖ μηδὲ βούλεται; he does not see fit nor wish, does he?) Pl.R. 349b:—in double indirect questions, εἴτε.. εἴτε.. ; εἰ.. εἴτε.. ; εἴτε.. ἢ .., either οὐ or μή can be used in the second clause,

    ὅπως ἴδῃς εἴτ' ἔνδον εἴτ' οὐκ ἔνδον S.Aj.7

    ;

    σκοπῶμεν εἰ ἡμῖν πρέπει ἢ οὔ Pl.R. 451d

    ; εἰ ἀληθὲς ἢ μή, πειράσομαι μαθεῖν ib. 339a;

    πολλὰ ἂν περιεσκέψω, εἴτε ἐπιτρεπτέον εἴτε οὔ·.. οὐδένα λόγον οὐδὲ συμβουλὴν ποιῇ, εἴτε χρὴ ἐπιτρέπειν σαυτὸν αὐτῷ εἴτε μή Id.Prt. 313a

    , 313b;

    ἀνάγκη τὴν ἐμὴν μητέρα, εἴτε θυγάτηρ ἦν Κίρωνος εἴτε μή, καὶ εἰ παρ' ἐκείνῳ διῃτᾶτο ἢ οὔ, καὶ γάμους εἰ διττοὺς ὑπὲρ ταύτης εἱστίασεν ἢ μὴ.. πάντα ταῦτα εἰδέναι τοὺς οἰκέτας Is.8.9

    ; τοὺς νόμους καταμανθάνειν εἰ καλῶς κεῖνται ἢ μή.. τοὺς λόγους εἰ ὀρθῶς ὑμᾶς διδάσκουσιν ἢ οὔ Antipho 5.14.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > εἰ

  • 62 οὐ

    οὐ, the negative of
    A fact and statement, as μή of will and thought; οὐ denies, μή rejects; οὐ is absolute, μή relative; οὐ objective, μή subjective. —The same differences hold for all compds. of οὐ and μή, and some examples of οὐδέ and οὐδείς are included below.—As to the Form, v. infr. G.
    A USAGE.
    I as the negative of single words,
    II as the negative of the sentence.
    I οὐ adhering to single words so as to form a quasi-compd. with them:—with Verbs: οὐ δίδωμι withhold, Il.24.296; οὐκ εἰῶ prevent, 2.132, 4.55, al.; οὐκ ἐθέλω refuse, 1.112, 3.289, al.; οὔ φημι deny, 7.393, 23.668, al. (In most of these uses μή can replace οὐ when the constr. requires it, e.g.

    εἰ μή φησι ταῦτα ἀληθῆ εἶναι Lycurg.34

    ; but sts. οὐ is retained,

    εἰ δ' ἂν.. οὐκ ἐθέλωσιν Il.3.289

    ;

    εἰ δέ κ'.. ου'κ εἰῶσι 20.139

    ;

    ἐὰν οὐ φάσκῃ Lys.13.76

    ; ἐάντε.. οὐ (v.l. μή)

    φῆτε ἐάντε φῆτε Pl. Ap. 25b

    ):—with Participles:

    οὐκ ἐθέλων Il.4.224

    , 300, 6.165, etc.:— with Adjectives:

    οὐκ ἀέκοντε 5.366

    , 768, al.;

    οὐ πολλήν Th.6.7

    , etc.:— with Adverbs:

    οὐχ ἥκιστα Id.1.68

    , etc.: rarely with Verbal Nouns (v. infr. 11.10).—On the use of οὐ in contrasts, v. infr. B.
    II as negativing the whole sentence,
    1 οὐ is freq. used alone, sts. with the ellipsis of a definite Verb, οὔκ (sc. ἀποκερῇ)

    , ἄν γε ἐμοὶ πείθῃ Pl.Phd. 89b

    : sts. as negativing the preceding sentence, Ar. Pax 850, X.HG1.7.19: as a Particle of solemn denial freq. with μά (q. v.) and the acc.; sts. without

    μά, οὐ τὸν πάντων θεῶν θεὸν πρόμον Ἅλιον S. OT 660

     (lyr.), cf. 1088 (lyr.), El. 1063 (lyr.), Ant. 758.
    4 with opt. in potential sense (without ἄν or κεν), also [dialect] Ep.,

    ὃ οὐ δύο γ' ἄνδρε φέροιεν 5.303

    , 20.286.
    5 with opt. and

    ἄν, κείνοισι δ' ἂν οὔ τις.. μαχέοιτο 1.271

    , cf. 301, 2.250, Hdt. 6.63, A.Pr. 979, S.Aj. 155 (anap.), E.IA 310, Ar.Ach. 403, etc.
    6 in dependent clauses οὐ is used,
    a with ὅτι or ὡς, after Verbs of saying, knowing, and showing,

    ἐκ μέν τοι ἐρέω.. ὡς ἐγὼ οὔ τι ἑκὼν κατερύκομαι Od.4.377

    , cf. S.El. 561, D.2.8, etc.: so with ind. or opt. and

    ἄν, ἀπελογοῦντο ὡς οὐκ ἄν ποτε οὕτω μωροὶ ἦσαν X.HG5.4.22

    , cf. Pl.R. 330a;

    ὡς δὲ οὐκ ἂν δικαίως αὐτοὺς δέχοισθε μαθεῖν χρή Th.1.40

    , cf. X.Cyr.1.1.3, etc.: with opt. representing ind. in orat. obliq.,

    ἔλεξε παιδὶ σῷ.. ὡς.. Ἕλληνες οὐ μενοῖεν A.Pers. 358

    , cf. S.Ph. 346, Th.1.38, X.HG6.1.1, Pl.Ap. 22b, etc.: for μή in such sentences, v. μή B. 3.
    b in all causal sentences, and in temporal and Relat. sentences unless there is conditional or final meaning,

    χωσαμένη, ὅ οἱ οὔ τι θαλύσια.. ῥέξε Il.9.534

    ;

    ἄχθεται ὅτι οὐ κάρτα θεραπεύεται Hdt.3.80

    ;

    διότι οὐκ ἦσαν δίκαι, οὐ δυνατοὶ ἦμεν παρ' αὐτῶν ἃ ὤφειλον πράξασθαι Lys.17.3

    ;

    μή με κτεῖν', ἐπεὶ οὐχ ὁμογάστριος Ἕκτορός εἰμι Il.21.95

    , etc.;

    νῦν δὲ ἐπειδὴ οὐκ ἐθέλεις.., εἶμι Pl.Prt. 335c

    ;

    ἐπειδὴ τὸ χωρίον οὐχ ἡλίσκετο Th.1.102

    ;

    νηπιάχοις οἷς οὔ τι μέλει πολεμήϊα ἔργα Il.2.338

    , etc.: in causal relative sentences,

    οἵτινές σε οὐχὶ ἐσώσαμεν Pl.Cri. 46a

    ; esp. in the combinations, οὐκ ἔστιν ὅστις οὐ .., as

    οὐκ ἔστ' ἐραστὴς ὅστις οὐκ ἀεὶ φιλεῖ E.Tr. 1051

    , cf. Hec. 298;

    οὔτις ἔσθ' ὃς οὔ S.Aj. 725

    ; οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅστις οὐ .. Isoc. 15.180.
    c after ὥστε with ind. or opt. with

    ἄν, ὥστ' οὐ δυνατόν σ' εἵργειν ἔσται Ar.V. 384

    , cf. S.Aj.98, OT 411;

    οὕτως αὐτοὺς ἀγαπῶμεν.. ὥστε.. οὐκ ἂν ἐθελήσαιμεν Isoc.8.45

    ;

    οὐκ ἂν ὡρκίζομεν αὐτὸν ὥστε τῆς εἰρήνης ἂν διημαρτήκει καὶ οὐκ ἂν ἀμφότερ' εἶχε D.18.30

    : ὥστε οὐ with inf. is almost invariably due to orat. obliq., ὥστ' οὐκ αἰσχύνεσθαι (for οὐκ αἰσχύνονται) Id.19.308, cf. Th.5.40, 8.76, Lys.18.6, Is.11.27 (cj. Reiske).—Rarely not in orat. obliq., S.El. 780, E. Ph. 1358, Hel. 108, D.53.2,9.48.
    7 in a conditional clause μή is necessary, except,
    a in Hom., when the εἰ clause precedes the apodosis and the verb is indic.,

    εἰ δέ μοι οὐκ ἐπέεσσ' ἐπιπείσεται Il. 15.162

    , cf. 178, 20.129, 24.296, Od.2.274, Il.4.160, Od.12.382, 13.144 (9.410 is an exception).
    b when the εἰ clause is really causal, as after Verbs expressing surprise or emotion,

    μὴ θαυμάσῃς, εἰ πολλὰ τῶν εἰρημένων οὐ πρέπει σοι Isoc.1.44

    ;

    κατοικτῖραι.., εἰ.. οὐδεὶς ἐς ἑκατοστὸν ἔτος περιέσται Hdt.7.46

    , cf. S.Aj. 1242; so also

    δεινὸν γὰρ ἂν εἴη πρῆγμα, εἰ Σάκας μὲν καταστρεψάμενοι δούλους ἔχομεν, Ἕλληνας δὲ οὐ τιμωρησόμεθα Hdt.7.9

    , cf. And.1.102, Lys.20.8 (prob.), D.8.55;

    οὐκ αἰσχρόν, εἰ τὸ μὲν Ἀργείων πλῆθος οὐκ ἐφοβήθη τὴν Λακεδαιμονίων ἀρχήν, ὑμεῖς δ' ὄντες Ἀθηναῖοι βάρβαρον ἄνθρωπον.. φοβήσεσθε

     ;

    Id.15.23

    , cf. Hdt.5.97, Lys.22.13.
    c when οὐ belongs closely to the next word (v. A. I), or is quoted unchanged,

    εἰ, ὡς νῦν φήσει, οὐ παρεσκευάσατο D.54.29

     codd.; εἰ δ' οὐκέτ' ἐστί (sc. ὥσπερ λέγεις)

    , τίνι τρόπῳ διεφθάρη

     ;

    E. Ion 347

    .
    8 οὐ is used with inf. in orat. obliq., when it represents the ind. of orat. recta,

    φαμὲν δέ οἱ οὐ τελέεσθαι Od.4.664

    , cf. Il.17.174, 21.316, S.Ph. 1389, etc.;

    λέγοντες οὐκ εἶναι αὐτόνομοι Th.1.67

    , cf. Pl.R. 348c, X.Cyr.1.6.18;

    οἶμαι.. οὐκ ὀλίγον ἔργον αὐτὸ εἶναι Pl.R. 369b

    , cf. S.OT 1051, Th.1.71, etc.; ἡγήσαντο ἡμᾶς οὐ περιόψεσθαι ib.39. (For the occasional use of μή, v. μή B. 5c; sts. we have οὐ and μή in consecutive clauses,

    οἶμαι σοῦ κάκιον οὐδὲν ἂν τούτων κρατύνειν μηδ' ἐπιθύνειν χερί S.Ph. 1058s

    q.;

    αὐτὸ ἡγοῦμαι οὐ διδακτὸν εἶναι μηδὲ.. παρασκευαστόν Pl.Prt. 319b

    .)
    9 οὐ is used with the part., when it can be resolved into a finite sentence with οὐ, as after Verbs of knowing and showing,

    τὸν κατθανόνθ' ὁρῶντες οὐ τιμώμενον E.Hec. 316

    ;

    κατενόησαν οὐ πολλοὺς τοὺς Θηβαίους ὄντας Th.2

    . 3;

    ἔργῳ δηλώσω οὐ παραγενόμενος Antipho2.4.8

    , etc.; or into a causal sentence,

    τῶν βαρβάρων οἱ πολλοὶ ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ διεφθάρησαν νέειν οὐκ ἐπιστάμενοι Hdt.8.89

    ;

    τὴν Μένδην πόλιν ἅτε οὐκ ἀπὸ ξυμβάσεως ἀνοιχθεῖσαν διήρπασαν Th.4.130

    ; or into a concessive sentence,

    δόξω γυναῖκα καίπερ οὐκ ἔχων ἔχειν E.Alc. 352

    , cf. S.Ph. 377, etc.: regularly with ὡς and part.,

    ὡς οὐχὶ συνδράσουσα νουθετεῖς τάδε Id.El. 1025

    , etc.;

    ἐθορυβεῖτε ὡς οὐ ποιήσοντες ταῦτα Lys.12.73

    , cf. S.Ph. 884, Aj. 682, Hdt.7.99, Th.1.2,5,28,68,90;

    ὥσπερ οὐ πάντας τούτῳ τῷ τεκμηρίῳ χρωμένους Lycurg.90

    , cf. Th.8.1, Isoc.4.11:—for exceptions, v. μή B. 6.
    b when the part. is used with the Art., μή is generally used, unless there is a distinct reference to a fact, when οὐ is occasionally found,

    ἡμεῖς δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς οὐκ οὔσης ἔτι [πόλεως] ὁρμώμενοι Th.1.74

    ;

    τοὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει οὐδὲν εἰδότας Id.4.111

    ;

    οἱ οὐκ ἐθέλοντες Antipho 6.26

    ;

    τῶν οὐ βουλομένων And.1.9

    ;

    τοὺς οὐδὲν ἀδικοῦντας ἀκρίτους ἀπέκτειναν Lys.12.82

    , cf. τὸν οὐδὲ συμπενθῆσαι τὰς τῆς πατρίδος συμφορὰς τολμήσαντα (preceded by τὸν.. μήτε ὅπλα θέμενον ὑπὲρ τῆς πατρίδος μήτε τὸ σῶμα παρασχόντα κτλ.) Lycurg.43;

    τὸ οὐχ εὑρημένον Pl.R. 427e

    .
    10 Adjectives and abstract Substantives with the article commonly take μή (v.

    μή B. 7

     ) but οὐ is occasionally used,

    τὰς οὐκ ἀναγκαίας πόσεις X.Lac.5.4

    ;

    τοὺς οὐδένας E.IA 371

    ;

    τὸν οὐδέν Id.Ph. 598

     (whereas ὁ μηδείς, τὸ μηδέν is the rule); τὴν τῶν γεφυρῶν οὐ διάλυσιν the non- dissolution of the bridges, the fact of their notbeing broken up, Th.1.137;

    ἡ οὐ περιτείχισις Id.3.95

    ;

    ἡ τῶν χωρίων οὐκ ἀπόδοσις Id.5.35

    , cf.E. Hipp. 196 (anap.); so without the article,

    ἐν οὐ καιπῷ Id.Ba. 1287

    ; οὐ πάλης ὕπο ib. 455.
    11 for οὐ μή, v. sub voc.
    12 in questions οὐ ordinarily expects a positive answer, οὔ νυ καὶ ἄλλοι ἔασι ..; Il.10.165; οὐχ ὁράᾳς ..; dost thou not see? Od.17.545;

    οὐκ.. ᾐσθόμην

     ;

    A.Pr. 956

    : so as a strong form of imper.,

    οὐκ ἀπαλλάξει

     ;

    E. Ion 524

    ;

    οὐκ ἀποκτενεῖτε τὸν μιαρὸν τοῦτον ἄνθρωπον

     ;

    Din.1.18

    ;

    οὐκ εἶ καταπιὼν Εὐριπίδην

     ;

    Ar.Ach. 484

    ; βάλλε, βάλλε folld. by οὐ βαλεῖς; οὐ βαλεῖς; ib. 281 and 283, cf. S.Ant. 885: also with opt. and ἄν, οὐκ ἂν δὴ τόνδ' ἄνδρα μάχης ἐρύσαιο ( = ἔρυσαι) ; Il.5.456; οὐκ ἂν φράσειας ( = φράσον) ; S.Ph. 1222; but in questions introduced by οὐ δή, οὐ δή του, οὔ που, οὔ τί που, a doubt is implied of the statement involved, and an appeal is made to the hearers, οὐ δή ποθ' ἡμῖν ξυγγενὴς ἥκεις ποθέν; surely you are not..? Id.El. 1202, cf. Ph. 900; οὔ τί που οὗτος Ἀπόλλων ..; Pi.P.4.87, cf. S.Ph. 1233, E.IA 670, Hel. 135, Ion 1113, Ar.Ra. 522, 526.
    B POSITION. οὐ is generally put immediately before the word which it negatives,

    οὐκ ἐκεῖνον ἐθεώμην.—ἀλλὰ τίνα μήν ; ἔφη ὁ Τιγράνης X.Cyr.3.1.41

    ;

    οὐχ αἱ τρίχες ποιοῦσιν αἱ λευκαὶ φρονεῖν Men.639

    ;

    οὐ διὰ τὸ μὴ ἀκοντίζειν οὐκ ἔβαλον αὐτὸν ἀλλὰ διὰ τὸ μηδενὶ ὑπὸ τὸ ἀκόντιον ὑπελθεῖν Antipho 3.4.6

    : in Poetry the position is freq. more free,

    κίνδυνος ἄναλκιν οὐ φῶτα λαμβάνει Pi.O.1.81

    ; οὐ ψεύδεϊ τέγξω λόγον ib. 4.19; κατακρύπτει δ' οὐ κόνις ib.8.79;

    χρὴ πρὸς θεὸν οὐκ ἐρίζειν Id.P. 2.88

    : sts. emphatically at the end of the clause,

    καὶ τοὶ γὰρ αἰθοίσας ἔχοντες σπέρμ' ἀνέβαν φλογὸς οὔ Id.O.7.48

    ;

    ταρβήσει γὰρ οὔ S.Aj. 545

    : in clauses opposed by μέν and δέ the οὐ (or μή) is freq. placed at the end,

    βούλονται μέν, δύνανται δ' οὔ Th.6.38

    ;

    οὗτος δ' ἦν καλὸς μέν, μέγας δ' οὔ X.An.4.4.3

    ;

    ἔδοξέ μοι ὁ ἀνὴρ δοκεῖν μὲν εἶναι σοφὸς.., εἶναι δ' οὔ Pl.Ap. 21c

    ; so

    τὸ Πέρσας μὲν λέληθε, ἡμέας μέντοι οὔ Hdt.1.139

    : freq. with

    ὁ μὲν.. ὁ δέ, οὐ πάσας χρὴ τὰς δόξας τιμᾶν, ἀλλὰ τὰς μέν, τὰς δ' οὔ Pl.Cri. 47a

    , cf. Ap. 24e, R. 475b, etc.;

    Λέριοι κακοί, οὐχ ὁ μέν, ὃς δ' οὔ Phoc.1

    : sts. in the first clause after

    μέν, οἱ δὲ στρατηγοὶ ἐξῆγον μὲν οὔ, συνεκάλεσαν δέ X.An.6.4.20

    , cf. 4.8.2, Cyr.1.4.10, Pl.Phd. 73b;

    κατώρα πᾶν μὲν οὒ τὸ στρατόπεδον Hdt.7.208

    .
    C ACCUMULATION. A simple neg. (οὐ or μή) is freq. repeated in composition with Prons., Advbs., or Conjs., as οὐδείς or μηδείς, οὐδέ or μηδέ, οὐδαμῶς or μηδαμῶς, first in Hom.,

    οὔ μιν ὁΐομαιοὐδὲ πεπύσθαι λυγρῆς ἀγγελίης Il.17.641

    ;

    ἀλλ' οὔ μοι Τρώων τόσσον μέλει ἄλγος ὀπίσσω οὔτ' αὐτῆς Ἑκάβης οὔτε Πριάμοιο ἄνακτος 6.450

    ;

    οὐκ ἔστιν οὐδὲν κρεῖσσον οἰκείου φίλου E.Andr. 986

    : the first neg. may be a compd.,

    καθεύδων οὐδεὶς οὐδενὸς ἄξιος οὐδὲν μᾶλλον τοῦ μὴ ζῶντος Pl. Lg. 808b

    ;

    οὐδενὶ οὐδαμῇ οὐδαμῶς οὐδεμίαν κοινωνίαν ἔχει Id.Prm. 166a

     (similarly with μή, Phdr. 236e): or a neg. Adj.,

    ἀδύνατος οὐδὲν ἄλλο πλὴν λέγειν μάτην E.Andr. 746

    ; οὐ follows the compd. neg.,

    οὐδ' εἰ πάντες ἔλθοιεν Πέρσαι, πλήθει γε οὐχ ὑπερβαλοίμεθ' ἂν τοὺς πολεμίους X. Cyr.2.1.8

    ; οὐδ' ἂν ἡ πόλις ἄρα ([etym.] ὅπερ ἄρτι ἐλέγομεν )

    ὅλη τοιοῦτον ποιῇ, οὐκ ἐπαινέσῃ Pl.R. 426b

    , cf. Smp. 204a: sts. a confirmative Particle accompanies the first οὐ or οὐδέ, and the neg. is repeated with emphasis,

    οὐδὲ μὲν οὐδέ μ' ἔασκες Il.19.295

    ;

    οὐδὲ γὰρ οὐδὲ Δρύαντος υἱὸς.. δὴν ἧν 6.130

    , v. οὐδέ C. 11;

    οὐ μέντοι οὐδὲ αὖ ὡς σύ μοι δοκεῖς οἴεσθαι Pl.Prt. 332a

    : so also in Trag. and [dialect] Att. without any such Particle, οὐ σμικρός, οὔχ, ἁγὼν ὅδε not small, no, is this struggle, S.OC 587;

    θεοῖς τέθνηκεν οὗτος, οὐ κείνοισιν, οὔ Id.Aj. 970

    , cf.Ar.Ra.28, 1308, X.Smp. 2.4, Pl.R. 390c.
    2 when the compd. neg. precedes and the simple neg. follows with the Verb, the opposing negs. produce an emphatic positive, οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων ἀδικῶν τίσιν οὐκ ἀποτείσει Orac. ap. Hdt.5.56;

    γλώσσης κρυφαῖον οὐδὲν οὐ διέρχεται S.Fr. 935

     (but prob. f.l.);

    οὐδεὶς οὐκ ἔπασχέ τι X.Smp.1.9

    .
    3 similarly each of two simple negs. may retain its negating force,

    ὥσπερ οὐ διὰ πρᾳότητα καὶ ἀσχολίαν τὴν ὑμετέραν οὐ δεδωκὼς ὑμῖν δίκην Lys.6.34

    ;

    ἐγὼ δ' οὐκ οἶμαι.. οὐ δεῖν ὑμᾶς ἀμύνεσθαι Id.13.52

     (similarly with μή, D.19.77): sts. a combination of a μέν- clause with a δέ- clause containing οὐ is negatived as a whole by a preceding οὐ, e.g.

    οὐ γὰρ δήπου Κτησιφῶντα μὲν δύναται διώκειν δι' ἐμέ, ἐμὲ δέ, εἴπερ ἐξελέγξειν ἐνόμιζεν, αὐτὸν οὐκ ἂν ἐγράψατο Id.18.13

    .
    D PLEONASM OF οὐ: after Verbs of denying, doubting, and disputing, folld. by ὡς or ὅτι with a finite Verb, οὐ is inserted to show the neg. character of the statement, where in Engl. the neg. is not required,

    ὡς μὲν οὐκ ἀληθῆ ταῦτ' ἐστὶν οὐκ ἔχετ' ἀντιλέγειν D.8.31

    , cf. Th.1.77, X.HG2.3.16, Smp.2.12, Isoc.5.57, etc.;

    οὐδεὶς ἂν τολμήσειεν ἀντειπεῖν ὡς οὐ τὴν μὲν ἐμπειρίαν μᾶλλον τῶν ἄλλων ἔχομεν Id.6.48

    , cf. And.4.34, D.16.4, etc.;

    οὐκ ἂν ἀρνηθεῖεν ἔνιοι ὡς οὐκ εἰσὶ τοιοῦτοι Id.9.54

    ;

    ἀρνεῖσθαι ὅτι οὐ παρῆν X.Ath.2.17

    ; οὐδ' αὐτὸς ὁ Λάμπις ἔξαρνος ἐγένετο ὡς οὐκ εἴη εἰρηκὼς κτλ. D.34.49;

    ἀμφισβητεῖν ὡς οὐχὶ.. δοτέον δίκην Pl.Euthphr.8c

    , cf. R. 476d, Prm. 135a; ἀπιστεῖν ὅτι οὐ .. Id.Men. 89d;

    ἀνέλπιστον καταστῆσαί τισιν ὡς οὐκ ἔσται μεταγνῶναι Th. 3.46

    : οὐ is sts. thus used in the second member of a negative comparative sentence,

    ἥκει ὁ Πέρσης οὐδέν τι μᾶλλον ἐπ' ἡμέας ἢ οὐ καὶ ἐπ' ὑμέας Hdt.4.118

    , cf. 5.94, 7.16.γ, Th.2.62,3.36: after πλήν, X.Lac. 15.6, D.18.45.
    E OMISSION OF οὐ: οὐ is sts. omitted, esp. by Poets, when it may be supplied from the next clause,

    γῆ δ' οὐδ' ἀὴρ οὐδ' οὐρανὸς ἦν Ar.Av. 694

    ;

    σιδήρῳ οὐδ' ἀργύρῳ χρέωνται οὐδέν Hdt.1.215

    ;

    ῥοδιακὴ οὖς οὐδὲ πυθμένα οὐκ ἔχουσα Inscr.Délos 313a84

     (iii B. C.).
    F in Poetry, if ἤ stands before οὐ, the two sounds coalesce into one syllable, as in

    ἦ οὐχ Il.5.349

    , cf. Od.1.298; so, in [dialect] Att.,

    μὴ οὐ S. OT 283

    , etc., and ἐγὼ οὔτε ib. 332,

    ἐγὼ οὐ Ar.Eq. 340

    .—This synizesis is general in [dialect] Ep., universal in [dialect] Att.
    G FORM. οὐ is used before consonants (including the digamma, e.g. before ἕθεν, οἱ, e(, Il.1.114, 2.392, 24.214, but not before ὅς Possess.,

    οὐχ ᾧ πατρί Od.13.265

    , cf.

    οὐκ ἐπέεσσι Il.15.162

    , etc.); οὐκ before vowels with spir. lenis, οὐχ before vowels with spir. asper; in our text of Hdt. οὐκ is used before all vowels (prob. because Hdt. had no spir. asper): the [dialect] Ep. form οὐκί [ῐ] is used by Hom. mostly at the end of a clause and at the close of the verse,

    ὅς τ' αἴτιος ὅς τε καὶ οὐκί Il.15.137

    ;

    ἠὲ καὶ οὐκί 2.238

    , 300,al.; but in the middle of a verse, 20.255; οὐχί [ῐ] is found twice in Hom., Il.15.716, 16.762, and is common in Trag., where it is freq. employed like οὔ emphatic (supr. B),

    τί δ' οὐχί

     ;

    A.Ag. 273

    ,Fr. 310;

    πῶς δ' οὐχί

     ;

    Id.Supp. 918

    , Ar. Pax 1027;

    ἐμὸς μὲν οὐχί E.IA 859

    : also in Prose, Th.1.120,al., 1 Ep.Cor. 5.12, etc.: the diphthong is genuine and always written ου ( ουκ, ουδε, etc.) in early Inscrr., IG12.10.22, etc.; in iv B.C. rarely written οκ, ib. 22.1635.112,116,121; οὐ abbreviated ο, Suid.s.v. Φιλοξένου γραμμάτιον.
    H ACCENTUATION. οὐ is oxytone acc. to Hdn.Gr.1.494 (text doubtfulin 504): Arist.SE 166b6, referring to Il.23.328 τὸ μὲν ου (i.e. οὐ = οὒ) καταπύθεται ὄμβρῳ, says λύουσι.. τῇ προσῳδίᾳ λέγοντες τὸ ου ὀξύτερον (i.e. οὗ), cf. 178b3. In codd. the word is written oxytone when folld. by a pause (v. supr. B), and is usu. written without any accent in other cases.
    I οὐ in connexion with other Particles will be found in alphabetical order, οὐ γάρ, οὐ μή, etc.—The corresponding forms of μή should be compared.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > οὐ

  • 63 προτίθημι

    προτίθημι (also thematic forms, [ per.] 3sg.
    A

    προτιθεῖ Hdt.1.133

    , [ per.] 3pl.

    προτιθεῖσι Id.7.197

    ), [tense] fut.

    - θήσω Th.3.67

    : [tense] aor.

    προὔθηκα Il.24.409

    , etc. (for προθέουσι v. προθέω (B)):—[voice] Med. (v. infr.):—[voice] Pass., [tense] aor. 1

    προὐτέθην E.Ph. 803

    , Pl.Phd. 90b, etc.; but [tense] pres. and [tense] impf. [voice] Pass. are usu. supplied by πρόκειμαι:—set before, set out, esp. of meals, τραπέζας νίζον καὶ πρότιθεν ([dialect] Ep. for προὐτίθεσαν) Od.1.112;

    βοῦν Hes.Th. 537

    ;

    τούτοισι προθεῖναι δαῖτα Hdt.1.207

    , cf. S.Aj. 1294, Ant. 775, Ph. 274, etc.;

    ξείνια στρατῷ Hdt.7.29

    :—[voice] Med., set before oneself, have set before one,

    δαῖτα Id.1.133

    , 4.26;

    κλίνας καὶ τραπέζας Plu.2.99e

    ; also προτίθεσθαί τισι ἄριστον cause it to be set before them, Chionid.7.
    b π. τινὰ κυσίν throw him to the dogs, Il.24.409; τινὰ θηρσὶν ἁρπαγὴν π. E. El. 896.
    2 expose a child, Hdt.1.112;

    π. τινὰ ἔρημον S.Ph. 268

    :—[voice] Pass.,

    ὁ θανάτῳ προτεθείς E.Ph. 803

     (lyr.).
    b set up as a mark or prize,

    στέφανόν τισι τῶν ἀγώνων Th.2.46

    ;

    σκοπὸν κάλλιστον ἐν τῷ ζῆν Plb.7.8.9

    :—[voice] Pass.,

    προὐτέθην ἐγὼ ἆθλον.. δορός E.Hel.42

    .
    4 fix, set, ἐς ἑβδομήκοντα ἔτεα οὖρον τῆς ζόης ἀνθρώπῳ π. Id.1.32:—[voice] Med.; οὖρον π. ἐνιαυτόν ib.74.
    5 appoint as a task or duty,

    τινί τι S.Tr. 1049

    ;

    νεωτέρῳ τοῦτο βαστάζειν πρόθες Id.Ant. 216

    ; δμῳαῖς π. πένθος οἰκεῖον στένειν ib. 1249, cf. Hdt. 9.94:—[voice] Med., propose to oneself as a task or object,

    ὅπερ προὐθέμεθα σκέψασθαι Pl.Phdr. 259e

    , R. 352d, cf. Sph. 221a, Tht. 169c;

    π. ψέγειν αὐτὸ ἢ ἐπαινεῖν Id.Lg. 638c

    , cf. Arist.EN 1142b19 (dub.), Hipparch. 1.1.6, Luc.Nec.19.
    b [voice] Med., c. [tense] fut. inf., propose to oneself, intend,

    προτεθειμένου κατοικήσειν ἐνταῦθα Syr.D. 13.256

     (Seleucia in Pieria, ii B.C.).
    6 [voice] Med., also, put forth on one's own part, display, show,

    εὐλάβειαν S.El. 1334

    ;

    ἀνδραγαθίαν Th.3.64

    ;

    ἔχθραν Id.8.85

    .
    7 [voice] Med., θνητοὺς ἐν οἴκτῳ προθέμενος setting before oneself in pity, feeling compassion for, A.Pr. 241.
    II π. νεκρόν lay out a dead body, let it lie in state, Hdt.5.8:—[voice] Med., E.Alc. 664, Supp.53 (lyr.), Ar.Lys. 611, Th.2.34, Lys.12.18, etc.;

    ποτήρια χρύσεα προθεῖτο Hdt.3.148

    .
    2 set out wares for show or sale, Luc.Nigr.25, al.
    3 display a public notice,

    τὸ λεύκωμα πρὸ τοῦ ναοῦ IG9(2).1109.35

     (Coropa, ii B.C.);

    ἐπ' αὐτῆς τῆς οἰκίας π. ἐν λευκώματι UPZ 106.20

     (ii B.C.);

    τὸ ὑπογεγραμμένον ἔκθεμα OGI664.4

     (Egypt, i A.D.), cf. POxy.2108.8 ([voice] Pass., iii A.D.); notify publicly,

    τοὺς [προέδρους] προτιθέναι περὶ ὧν δεῖ βουλεύεσθαι IG42(1).68.80

     (Epid., iv B.C.); περὶ ὧν.. οἱ ἄρχοντες προτίθεισι Ἀρχ.Δελτ.9 παρ.53 ([place name] Eresus), cf. IG 12(2).526a21 (ibid., iv B.C.), 645b35 (Nesus, iv B.C.); τὰς πράξεις (exactions).. τῶν προτιθεμένων ([voice] Pass.)

    κατὰ τὰς ἐγγραφάς Arist.Pol. 1321b42

    ; call a case for trial by means of a public notice,

    τῶν κατ' αὐτοὺς προτεθέντων UPZ118.18

     (ii B.C.); οἱ προτεθέντες ἐπ' ἐμὲ καὶ μὴ ὑπακούσαντες ἴστωσαν ὅτι .. PHamb.29.6 (i A.D.); advertise for sale or other purpose, BGU 992 i 7 ([voice] Pass., ii B.C.), PLips.64.44 (iv A.D.), etc.; τοῖς συλλημψομένοις ὑμῖν γέρα προτιθέντα advertising rewards to those of you who apprehend (robbers), POxy.1408.16 (iii A.D.).
    4 propose, bring forward a thing to be examined and debated, also give an opportunity for debate, voting,

    ἐς μέσον σφι π. πρῆγμα Hdt.1.206

    ;

    π. τὸν λόγον Id.8.59

    ;

    γνώμας σφίσιν αὐτοῖς Th. 1.139

    ; π. λόγον (sc. εἰς ἐκκλησίαν) Aeschin.2.65;

    λόγον περί τινος X.Mem.4.2.3

    ; γνώμας π. αὖθις Ἀθηναίοις, of the Prytanes, Th.6.14, cf. 3.36; π. τὴν διαγνώμην αὖθις περὶ Μυτιληναίων ib.42, cf. Isoc.8.15; π. βουλὴν εἴτε.. εἴτε .. D.H.6.15;

    τὸν ἐπιμήνιον, ἢν μὴ προθῇ, ἑκατὸν στατῆρας ὀφείλειν SIG58.10

     (Milet., v B.C.), cf. 141.12 (Corc. Nigra, iv B.C.), 167.13 (Mylasa, iv B.C.), al.; προθεῖναι αὖθις περὶ Μυτιληναίων λέγειν propose a discussion about.., Th.3.38;

    τὸ συμφέρον ἡ πόλις προὐτίθει σκοπεῖν D.18.273

    , etc.; π. αὐτοῖς κρίσιν appoint a trial for them, Lys.27.8;

    π. αὐτοῖς ἀγορὰν δικῶν Luc.

    Bis Acc.4; προέθηκε.. λέγειν τὰ ἑκατέροισι.. κατέργασται has proposed (or initiated) a recital of what each has done, Hdt.9.27: c. dat. pers. et inf., Id.3.38: c. acc. et inf.,

    π. γνώμην ἀποφαίνεσθαι τὸν βουλόμενον Id.8.49

    :—[voice] Med.,

    ἤν τις προθῆται ψῆφον, ὥστε μὴ εἶναι τὸν νόμον τοῦτον SIG45.33

     (Halic., v B.C.):—[voice] Pass., οὐ προὐτέθη σφίσι λόγος speech was not allowed them, X.HG1.7.5;

    ψῆφος περὶ ἡμῶν ὑπὲρ ἀνδραποδισμοῦ προτεθεῖσα D.19.65

    .
    III put forward, as one foot before the other,

    βραδύπουν ἤλυσιν ἄρθρων E.Hec.67

     (anap.).
    2 hold out as a pretext,

    αἰτίαν S.Aj. 1051

    :—[voice] Med.,

    τὴν συγγένειαν Plb. 2.19.1

    , etc.
    IV put before or first, προτιθέντι ἀνάγκη.. λέγειν, opp. ἐπιλέγοντι, Arist.Rh. 1394a15, cf. b28;

    π. τοῦ λόγου προοίμιον Pl. Lg. 723c

    ; set down first in writing, προθεὶς ἄρχοντα Νικόμαχόν φησιν οὕτως· ἐπὶ τούτου κτλ." Did. in D.1.19, cf. 8.17, al., Gal.19.183:— [voice] Med., put in front,

    τοὺς γροσφομάχους Plb.1.33.9

    ; premise,

    λόγον Id.3.118.11

    ;

    τὰς προειρημένας αἰτίας Id.4.25.6

    :—[voice] Pass.,

    τὸ μὴ καὶ τὸ οὒ προτιθέμενα τῶν ἐπιόντων ὀνομάτων Pl.Sph. 257c

    : metaph., Th.2.42.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > προτίθημι

  • 64 σύ

    σύ [pron. full] [ῠ],
    A thou: Pron. of the second pers.:—[dialect] Ep. nom. [full] τύνη [pron. full] [ῡ] Il.5.485, al. ([dialect] Lacon. [full] τούνη Hsch.); [dialect] Aeol. [full] σύ Sapph.Supp.16.6, 21.9; [dialect] Dor. [full] τύ [pron. full] [ῠ] Pi.O.1.85, Epich.34, al., Theoc.3.33, etc.; [dialect] Boeot. [full] τού [short syll.] Corinn.Supp.2.83, A.D.Pron.55.6 (also [full] τούν ib. 50.27, 55.6): Nom. [full] σύ, Od.18.31, A.Ag. 1035, Ar.Nu.29, etc.; voc., Od.21.193, Ar.Ach. 165, Pl. 1069.—Gen. [full] σοῦ, h.Hom.29.4, elsewh. only [dialect] Att., Ar.Ach. 302, etc.; enclit. σου, S.Ph. 761, OT 538, etc.; never in Hom., who uses σεῦ, ll.3.206, al., σέο ib. 446, al. (also in Lyr., Archil.(?)inPLit.Lond.54, B.3.65),

    σεῖο Il.3.137

    , al.; also

    σέθεν 1.180

    , al. (which also occurs in Lyr., Sapph.33, B.10.9, and Trag., A.Th. 264, al.), and as enclit. σευ, Il.5.811, al., σεο 1.396: Hdt. has only

    σέο 1.124

    , σεο (enclit.) ib.9, σεῦ ibid., 3.42,85, 7.38, σευ (enclit.) 3.36, 134, 7.49:—[dialect] Dor. τεῦ, τευ, Theoc.5.19, 10.36, etc.; rarely τέο, Alcm.17; lengthd.

    τεοῦ Epich.145

    , Sophr.84, and

    τεοῖο Il.8.37

    , 468; [dialect] Boeot.

    τεῦς Corinn.24

    ; [dialect] Dor.

    τεοῦς Sophr.59

    ; also

    τιοῦς A.D. Pron.74.27

    ;

    τεῦς Theoc.2.126

    ; τοι v.l. in Id.7.25; enclit. τεος Sophr.83; Cret.

    τέορ Hsch.

    ; other [dialect] Dor. forms are τίω, τίως, both Rhinth.13,

    τίος A.D.Pron.75.24

    .—Dat. [full] σοί, Il.1.158, 167, Archil.88, Mimn.8, Sapph.7,99, A.Pr.3, Hdt.3.42, 6.86.ά, 7.52, etc.; [dialect] Dor.

    τοί Alcm.86

     (oxyt.); [dialect] Dor., Lesb., and [dialect] Ion. enclit. τοι Alem.33, Sapph. Frr.2.2,8, Archil.79, Hippon.20, Anacr.44, 75.3, Pi.N.3.76, B.10.104, Hdt.1.115, 3.35,63,85; in Hom., Lesbian Lyr., and [dialect] Ion. Lyr. and Prose τοι is always enclit., σοί never enclit. ( τοί and σοι are not found exc. σοι Od.3.359, 11.381, ς ([etym.] οι) Il.1.170, and in codd. of Pi.P. 4.270, 9.55; rarer than τοι in Hdt., 3.69, al.); in [dialect] Att. both σοί and σοι (enclit.) are used (

    σοί Ar.Nu. 361

    , etc., σοι ib.87, etc.), τοί and τοι are not used; σοι is never elided exc. in Il.1.170, τοι is elided in Od. 1.60, 347, Alc.55, Id.Oxy. 1788 Fr.15 ii 9, Sapph.28.2; [dialect] Ep. and Lyr. also [full] τεΐν, Il.11.201, Od.4.619, Epigr. ap. Hdt.5.60,61, Ar.Av. 930; also [full] τίν [pron. full] [ῐ], Alcm.16, Pi.P.1.29, 8.68 (dub. l.); [full] τίν [pron. full] [ῑ], Id.I.6(5).4, Theoc.2.20 ( τίν before a consonant, Pi.O.10(11).93); also

    τεΐ Alcm.53

    ;

    τίνη Rhinth.13

    .—Acc. [full] σέ, Il.6.256, al.; enclit. σε, 1.26, Sapph.1.2, Supp.23.9, Hdt.3.42, etc.; in late Gr. σέν, Anatolian Studies p.76; [dialect] Dor.

    τέ Alcm.52

    , Pi.O.1.48, Theoc.1.5, Call.Fr. 114; τ' v.l. (cod. R) in Ar.Ach. 779 (on the accent v. A.D.Pron.54.14, 83.4); τρέ (leg. τϝέ) Hsch.; or (enclit.) τυ IG42(1).121.69 (Epid., iv B.C.), Ar.Eq. 1225, Ach. 730 (dub. in Ach. 779), Theoc.1.56,78, etc.:—also

    τίν Corinn.4

    , Cerc.7.6, Theoc.11.39,55,68.
    2 in combination with γε, [full] σύ γε, [full] σέ γε, etc. (cf. ἔγωγε), thou at least, for thy part, freq. in Hom. and [dialect] Att.; [dialect] Dor.

    τύγε Epich.[ 272]

    , Timocr.1 (v.l. τύ γα)

    ; τύγᾰ Theoc.5.69

    ,71; [dialect] Boeot. [full] τούγα A.D.Pron.55.6: dat. [full] σοί γε Il.1.557: acc. [full] σέ γε 10.96, etc.:—also [full] σύ περ 24.398.
    3 σύ c. inf. (as imper.), Hdt.3.134, 4.163.
    II Dual nom. and acc. [full] σφῶϊ, Il.1.336, 4.286, al., you two, both of you; [full] σφώ (not σφῴ, cf. A.D. Pron.85.17), Il.1.574, 11.782, 13.47, S.OC 344, 1543, etc.—Gen. and Dat. [full] σφῶϊν, Il.4.341, al.; [var] contr. σφῷν once in Hom., Od.4.62, and always in [dialect] Att. (Hdn.Gr.1.475) and Trag., e.g. A.Pr. 12, S.OC 342, OT 1495, Pl.Lg. 892e (codd. Pl. have σφῶϊν in Tht. 193c, al.,

    σφῶν Euthd. 273e

    , al.). None of these forms are enclit., A.D.Pron.38.9, 85.12; cod. A of Pl.Lg. 658c, 673e, 689a wrongly makes σφῳν enclit.; Ζεὺς σφὼ is prescribed in Il. 15.146 by Hdn.Gr.2.93.— σφῶϊ is never dat.; in Il.4.286 it is the acc. depending on κελεύω; σφῶϊν is never acc.; in Od.23.52 it is dat. commodi.
    III Plur. nom. [full] ὑμεῖς, Il.2.75, al. (before a vowel, 4.246, 7.194, al.), Pherecyd.Syr. 11, Democr.29a, Hdt.3.72, etc., ye, you; [dialect] Aeol. and [dialect] Ep.

    ὔμμες Il.1.274

    , al., Sapph.24, 25; [dialect] Dor.

    ὑμές Sophr.60

    , Ar.Ach. 760, 761, 862;

    ὑμέν SIG685.118

     (Crete, ii B.C.), GDI5155.6 (ibid., ii B.C.); [dialect] Boeot.

    οὐμές Corinn.6

    ; a resolved form ὑμέες, Parth.Fr.14, is a poeticlicence (so A.D.Pron.93.3 ) rather than genuine Ionic (v.l. in Hdt.8.22).— Gen. [full] ὑμῶν, Ar.Ach. 143, etc.; ὑμέων (disyll.) Il.7.159, Od.13.7, al., Archil.74.6 ( ὑμῶν codd.), Sol.11.5 (v.l. ὑμῶν) ; ὑμέων also Hdt.3.73, 6.130, al.; as trisyll., Herod.2.27;

    ὑμείων Il.4.348

    , 7.195, al.; [dialect] Dor.

    ὑμέων Sophr.46

    ; also ὑμῶν, A.D.Pron.95.23; [dialect] Aeol.

    ὑμμέων Alc. 96

    ; [dialect] Boeot.

    οὐμίων Corinn.22

    .—Dat. [full] ὑμῖν, Od.2.46, Hdt.1.126, etc.; [dialect] Ion. enclit.

    ὗμῐν A.D.Pron.97.28

    , also [dialect] Dor., Sophr.91; [dialect] Dor. (not enclit.) ὑμίν [ῐ] Id.92; ὑμίν [ῐ] also in S.Aj. 864, 1242, OT 991, 1402, Ant. 308, El. 804, al. (but ὗμιν shd. perh. be restd. where the sense needs an enclitic on the principle stated by A.D.Pron.35.6, 36.5, Synt.130.23); ὕμιν (as enclit.) is prescribed by Hdn.Gr. (2.124 ) in Il.24.33, by EM432.34 in Od.1.376, 2.141, etc.:—[dialect] Aeol. and [dialect] Ep. ὔμμῐ, ὔμμῐν, Od. 2.316, 11.336, al., Hes.Sc. 328, Sapph.14, Alc.Supp. 26.9, Pi.O. 11(10).17.—Acc. [full] ὑμᾶς, Ar.Ach. 325, etc. (

    -υ Orph.A. 820

    , v.l. in S.Ph. 222; ὗμας or (more prob.) ὕμας is required by the metre in Babr.9.9, 47.11); [dialect] Ion. ὑμέας (disyll.) Od.21.198, al.; enclit. ὕμεας (disyll.) Herod.2.60 (Pap.); ὑμέας also Hdt.1.126, al.; [dialect] Aeol. and [dialect] Ep.

    ὔμμε Il.23.412

    , al., Pi.I.6(5).19; also in A.Eu. 620 (trim.), and S.Ant. 846(lyr.); [dialect] Dor.

    ὑμέ Alcm.3

    , Sophr.52, Ar.Ach. 737, Lys. 1076, SIG528.3 (Cretan dial., iii B.C.), 622 B 8 (Cretan, ii B.C.).—The pl. is sts. used in addressing one person, when others are included in the speaker's thought, as Od. 12.81, Archil.89. (With σύ cf. Lat. tu, Goth. pu; with τοι Skt. gen. and dat. te; the origin of σφῶϊ is doubtful; with ὑμεῖς cf. Skt. acc. pl. yusmān.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > σύ

  • 65 κριτήριον

    κριτήριον, ου, τό (s. κρίνω; Pla.+) prim. ‘means for judging/trying, a standard.’ Neither this nor the mng. ‘judgment’ (as SEG XXXVIII, 1224, 16) is found in the NT.
    ① a forum for justice, lawcourt, tribunal (so since Pla., Leg. 6, 767b, also Polyb.; Diod S; SIG 683, 48; 807, 9; UPZ 118, 15; PHib 29=Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 259, 5; BGU 1054, 1; LXX; TestAbr; ApcEsdr 2:30 p. 26, 24 Tdf. al.; cp. Philo, Virt. 66) ἕλκειν τινὰ εἰς κριτήρια drag someone into court Js 2:6 (cp. PTurin I, 1 VI, 11 [117 B.C.] ἑλκυσθέντων ἁπάντων εἰς τὸ κριτήριον). ἔστη εἰς τὸ κ. (Mary) appeared before the tribunal (of the priests) GJs 15:2; [ἀπ] ήγαγον αὐτὴν εἰς τὸ κ. 15:2 v.l. This mng. may underlie two other pass. in our lit. where κ. is found: ἀνάξιοί ἐστε κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων; could perh. mean: are you unfit to form even the most insignificant courts (i.e. those that have jurisdiction over the petty details of everyday life)? 1 Cor 6:2. Likew. βιωτικὰ κριτήρια ἐὰν ἔχητε, τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους καθίζετε; if you have (need for) courts for the matters of everyday life, do you appoint insignificant people (as judges)? vs. 4 (καθίζειν κριτήριον as Polyb. 9, 33, 12). But in both cases the trend is to prefer for κ. the sense
    ② case before a court, lawsuit, legal action (e.g., JWeiss, Ltzm., Sickenberger, H-DWendland). Cp. Cyr. Ins. ln. 21 θανατηφόρα κριτήρια=lawsuits involving capital punishment (corresp. to Lat. judicia capitis); SEG VIII, 13 (=Διάταγμα Καίσαρος [I A.D.]; Boffo, Iscrizioni no. 39 [lit.]) ln. 14 κριτήριον γενέσθαι=the lawsuit is to be tried. Sim. Diod S 1, 72, 4; 36, 3, 3.—New Docs 4, 157 (Pfuhl-Möbius ref.=SEG above). DELG s.v. κρίνω. M-M. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κριτήριον

  • 66 μέσος

    μέσος, η, ον (Hom.+). The distinction between ‘middle’ and ‘among’ for μ. is sometimes rather fluid, and some of the passages here cited may fit equally well under 1 or 2.
    ① pert. to a middle position spatially or temporally, middle, in the middle.
    ⓐ as adj. (of intermediate terms: Pla., Rep. 330b, Pol. 303a) ὁ μέσος αὐτῶν ἀνήρ the man in their midst, apparently surrounded by them Hs 9, 12, 7. μέσης νυκτός at midnight (3 Km 3:20.—B-D-F §270, 2; Rob. 495; Lobeck, Phryn. p. 53; 54; 465) Mt 25:6. ἡμέρας μέσης at midday (Jos., Bell. 1, 651, Ant. 17, 155) Ac 26:13. εἰς μέσην τὴν οἰκοδομήν into the middle of the building Hs 9, 7, 5; cp. 9, 8, 2; 4; 6 (cp. Philo, Fuga 49 εἰς μέσον τὸν ποταμόν; Jos., Ant. 4, 80 εἰς μέσον τὸ πῦρ). ἐσταύρωσαν … μέσον τὸν Ἰησοῦν they crucified Jesus between (them) J 19:18. ἐσχίσθη τὸ καταπέτασμα μέσον the curtain was torn in two Lk 23:45 (cp. Artem. 4, 30 τὸ ἱμάτιον μέσον ἐρρωγέναι). ἐλάκησεν μέσος Ac 1:18 (cp. Aristoph., Ran. 955). ἐν μέσοις τοῖς ὀργάνοις τοῦ διαβόλου in the midst of the tools of the devil 2 Cl 18:2 (for the syntax cp. Gen 2:9 ἐν μέσῳ τῷ παραδείσῳ).
    ⓑ as subst. neut. τὸ μ. the middle (on the absence of the art. s. B-D-F §264, 4; cp. Rob. 792) ἀνὰ μέσον τινός (s. ἀνά 1) ἀνὰ μέσον τῶν ὁρίων within or through the region Mk 7:31. ἀνὰ μ. αὐτῶν between them GPt 4:10; Hs 9, 2, 3; 9, 15, 2. ἀνὰ μ. ἐκκλησίας ἁγίων B 6:16; 4:10; διακρῖναι ἀνὰ μ. τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ between one (congregation) member and another 1 Cor 6:5 (s. ἀνά 1b. Perh. μέσος prompted a shortening of the sentence tending to obscurity; cp. the Stoic expr. μέσα καθήκοντα = καθήκοντα ἃ ἐν μέσῳ ἐστὶ κατορθωμάτων κ. ἁμαρτημάτων: MPohlenz, D. Stoa II ’49, 73f). τὸ ἀρνίον τὸ ἀ. μ. τοῦ θρόνου the lamb who is (seated) on the center of the throne Rv 7:17. ἀνὰ μ. τῆς ὁδοῦ (they made) half their journey GJs 17:3.—διὰ μέσου αὐτῶν through the midst of them (X., An. 1, 4, 4; Aesop. Fab. 147 P.=247 H./201a Ch./152 [I, II] H-H.; Am 5:17; Jer 44:4; Jdth 11:19; 1 Macc 5:46; Ath. 18, 3 ‘between’) Lk 4:30; J 8:59 v.l. διὰ μέσον Σαμαρείας καὶ Γαλιλαίας Lk 17:11 prob. can only mean through Samaria and Galilee; but this raises a practical difficulty, since we should expect to find the provinces mentioned in the opposite order. Perh. the text is damaged (cp. the vv.ll. διὰ μέσου and μέσον; s. B-D-F §222; Rob. 648; JBlinzler, AWikenhauser Festschr. ’54, 46ff. If the v.l. διὰ μέσου Σ. καὶ Γ. should be correct, we could compare Maximus Tyr. 28, 4a διὰ μέσου πίστεως κ. ἀπιστίας=throughout between). For the view that μέσον signifies the area betw. S. and G. s. the comm. Cp. δια B1.—εἰς τὸ μέσον into the middle or center (X., Cyr. 3, 1, 6; Dio Chrys. 19 [36], 24; 3 Km 6:8; Jos., Ant. 9, 149) Mk 3:3; Lk 4:35; 5:19; 6:8; J 20:19, 26 (ἔστη εἰς τὸ μέσον as Vi. Aesopi G 82 P.); Hs 9, 8, 5; also in the middle 9, 6, 1. W. gen. (X., An. 1, 5; 14a; Jer 21:4; 48:7; Sb 6270, 13) εἰς τὸ μ. αὐτῶν in the midst of them 9, 11, 7. Without the art. (LXX; Jos., Vi. 334; SibOr 3, 674) εἰς μ. τοῦ πεδίου in the middle of the plain Hs 9, 2, 1 (εἰς μ.=‘in the middle’, as Ps.-Clem., Hom. 3, 30 p. 44, 21 Lag.). τί … τὸ ἔριον εἰς μ. τῶν ἀκανθῶν τιθέασιν; Why do they place the wool in the middle of the thorns? 7:11. ἀναστὰς εἰς μ. he arose (and came) forward Mk 14:60 (cp. Theocr. 22, 82 ἐς μέσον=into the middle; Himerius, Or. 63 [=Or. 17], 2 εἰς μέσον ἔρχεσθαι=come into the open; X., Cyr. 4, 1, 1 στὰς εἰς τὸ μ.).—ἐν τῷ μ. among, before (more closely defined by the context, or = in public [so Clearch., Fgm. 45 οἴκοι καὶ μὴ ἐν τῷ μέσῳ; Appian, Liby. 15 §63]) Mt 14:6 (Dio Chrys. 30 [79], 39 ὀρχεῖσθαι ἐν τῷ μέσω; Lucian, Pereg. 8) and into the middle, before (them) (Vi. Aesopi W c. 86 στὰς ἐν τῷ μέσῳ ἔφη) Ac 4:7. Without the art. (LXX) ἐν μέσῳ (on the spelling ἐμ μέσῳ, which occurs several times as v.l., s. B-D-F §19, 1; Mlt-H. 105) abs. into the middle, before (someone) (Appian, Hann. 16 §67, Liby. 14 §59; Jos., Ant. 7, 278) J 8:3; MPol 18:1 and in the middle (Pla., Rep. 558a; Herm. Wr. 4, 3; PLille 1 recto, 5 [259 B.C.]; GrBar 13:4) J 8:9. W. gen. of place (Aeneas Tact. 1529; 1532; TestAbr A 12 p. 90, 21 [Stone p. 28], B 8 p. 113, 3 [St. p. 74]; ParJer 1:2; GrBar 10:2) τῆς θαλάσσης (En 97:7) in the middle of the lake Mk 6:47. τῆς πλατείας through the middle of the street Rv 22:2. ἐν μ. τῆς αὐλῆς in the middle of the courtyard Lk 22:55a; τοῦ τάφου GPt 13:55. ἐν μ. αὐτῆς within it (the city of Jerusalem) Lk 21:21; cp. Dg 12:3; MPol 12:1; 12:2(?). ἐν μ. τοῦ θρόνου καὶ τῶν τεσσάρων ζῴων on the center of the throne and among the four living creatures Rv 5:6a (w. double gen. also between: Appian, Hann. 14 §60, Bell. Civ. 5, 23 §92; Arrian, Anab. 1, 20, 2; 3, 28, 8 al.; Lucian, Fugit. 10 ἐν μ. ἀλαζονείας κ. φιλοσοφίας). ἐν μέσῳ τ. θρόνου around (on every side of) the throne 4:6 (but between the throne and a more remote point: RBrewer, JBL 71, ’52, 227–31).—ἐν μέσῳ ἐκκλησίας Hb 2:12 (Ps 21:23); cp. Ac 17:22. κατὰ μέσον (Jos., Bell. 5, 207; SibOr 3, 802 κατὰ μέσσον=‘in the middle’ [of the day]) κατὰ μ. τῆς νυκτός about midnight Ac 16:25 D; 27:27.
    ⓒ The neut. μέσον serves as adv. (e.g., Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 43 §175 μ.=meanwhile) ἦν μέσον ὡς he was in the center of it as MPol 15:2; and is used as prep. w. gen. (B-D-F §215, 3; Rob. 644. Cp. Hdt. 9, 107, 2; Polyb. 8, 25, 1; Epict. 2, 22, 10; LXX, TestSol; TestAbr A 4 p. 80, 31 [Stone p. 8]; JosAs 24:21; Jos., Ant. 6, 65; SibOr 3, 319) μ. τῆς θαλάσσης in the middle of the lake Mt 14:24 v.l.; μ. γενεᾶς σκολιᾶς in the midst of a crooked generation Phil 2:15 (cp. Maximus Tyr. 36, 5a ἐν μέσῳ τῷ σιδηρῷ τούτῳ γένει).
    ② pert. to a position within a group, without focus on mediate position, among.
    ⓐ as adj. ἐκάθητο ὁ Πέτρος μέσος αὐτῶν Peter was sitting among them Lk 22:55 (the point being not as center of attention but inconspicuously in the group; cp. Jos., Ant. 9, 107). μέσος ὑμῶν ἕστηκεν J 1:26 (Jos., Ant. 14, 23). τοῦ πύργου μέσου Hs 9, 8, 2. εἶδον … μέσον αὐτῶν τὸν Παῦλον AcPl Ha 11, 14.
    ⓑ as subst. neuter ἀνὰ μέσον τινός (s. ἀνά 1) among someth. Mt 13:25. W. gen. pl. (TestJob 32:6 ἐν μέσῳ τῶν τέκνων σου) in the midst of, among in answer to the questions where and whither (B-D-F §215, 3 app.) Mt 18:2, 20; Mk 9:36; Lk 2:46; 24:36; Ac 1:15; 2:22; 6:15 D; 27:21; Rv 5:6b; cp. 6:6. Of close personal relationship ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν among you = in communion with you Lk 22:27; 1 Th 2:7.—ἐν μ. λύκων among wolves Mt 10:16; Lk 10:3; 2 Cl 5:2.—W. gen. pl. of things (Alciphron 3, 24, 3) Lk 8:7; Rv 1:13; 2:1. ἐκ (τοῦ) μ. from among (X., An. 1, 5, 14b; oracular response in Diod S 9, 3, 2; LXX=מִתּוֹךְ): αἴρειν τι (or τινά) ἐκ (τοῦ) μέσου (τινῶν) Col 2:14; 1 Cor 5:2 (s. αἴρω 3). ἁρπάσαι αὐτὸν ἐκ μ. αὐτῶν Ac 23:10 (s. ἁρπάζω 2a). ἀφορίζειν τοὺς πονηροὺς ἐκ μ. τῶν δικαίων Mt 13:49 (s. ἀφορίζω 1). γίνεσθαι ἐκ μ. 2 Th 2:7 (s. γίνομαι 6b). ἐξέρχεσθαι ἐκ μ. αὐτῶν from among them Ac 17:33; cp. 2 Cor 6:17 (cp. Is 52:11). κύριος λαμβάνει ἑαυτῷ ἔθνος ἐκ μ. ἐθνῶν 1 Cl 29:3 (cp. Dt 4:34).—B. 864. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > μέσος

  • 67 φαίνω

    φαίνω (Hom.+) fut. 3 pl. φανοῦσιν Da 12:3; 1 aor. ἔφανα (B-D-F §72; Mlt-H. 214f), subj. 3 sg. φάνῃ Rv 8:12; 18:23; 2 pf. πέφηνα (Tat.). Mid.: aor. subj. 3 sg. φάνηται (Just., A I, 7, 4). Pass.: impf. ἐφαινόμην; 2 fut. φανήσομαι (2 Macc 6:27; s. B-D-F §79; Mlt-H. 262; the older φανοῦμαι only in the LXX—quot. 1 Pt 4:18); 2 aor. ἐφάνην; pf. 3 sg. πέφανται and inf. πέφανθαι (Just.)
    ① to shine or to produce light, shine
    ⓐ as act., exc. for GJs 16:2 v.l. (s. deStrycker ad loc.), in our lit. only intr. shine, give light, be bright (Aristoph., Nub. 586 of the sun; Pla., Tim. 39b; Theocr. 2, 11 of the moon; Gen 1:15, 17; En 104:2; 2; TestJob 31:5 of stars; SibOr 5, 522; 8, 203) sun Rv 1:16. Sun and moon 21:23 (ApcMos 31); moon PtK 2 p. 14, 27; Dg 7:2. A lamp (1 Macc 4:50) 2 Pt 1:19; in imagery J 5:35 (in a comparison Theoph. Ant. 2, 13 [p. 134, 4]). Light Rv 18:23 (φάνῃ modern edd.; φανῇ t.r.) in imagery J 1:5; 1J 2:8. Day and night shine, in so far as the sun, or moon and stars give their light Rv 8:12 (text φάνῃ; v.l. φανῇ). φαίνοντος ἤδη τοῦ ὄρθρου AcPl Ha 4, 3 (s. ὄρθρος).—Of the brightness of a heavenly messenger AcPl Ha 3, 28; 31; 36.
    ⓑ pass., in act. sense, of light and its sources shine, flash (Is 60:2) ἐφάνη φῶς μέγα ἐν τῷ σπηλαίῳ GJs 19:2 (JosAs 14:3 φῶς ἀνεκλάλητον) of stars, in imagery Phil 2:15 (TestJob 31:5). Of lightning as a portent (X., Cyr. 1, 6, 1) Mt 24:27. Of light Rv 18:23 (v.l. φανῇ). Of a star appear Mt 2:7 (FBoll, ZNW 18, 1918, 45f); GJs 21:2 codd. Of the day (Appian, Iber. 35 §143 φαινομένης ἡμέρας) Rv 8:12.
    ② to become visible, appear, pass. φαίνομαι w. act./intr. sense
    ⓐ appear, be or become visible, be revealed τότε ἐφάνη καὶ τὰ ζιζάνια Mt 13:26 (cp. 2 Macc 1:33 τό ὕδωρ ἐφάνη). τά ἔργα τῶν ἀνθρώπων 2 Cl 16:3. τό σημεῖον τοῦ υἱοῦ τ. ἀνθρώπου Mt 24:30. Cp. D 16:6. ἀτμὶς φαινομένη (opp. ἀφανιζομένη) Js 4:14. Cp. Hv 3, 2, 6a. ὁ ἀσεβὴς ποῦ φανεῖται; what will become of the godless man? 1 Pt 4:18 (Pr 11:31). οὐδέποτε ἐφάνη οὕτως nothing like this was ever seen (=happened) Mt 9:33. τὸ φαινόμενον that which is visible (Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 270) IRo 3:3a. τὰ φαινόμενά σου εἰς πρόσωπον whatever is visible before your face (opp. τὰ ἀόρατα) IPol 2:2. φαινόμενα things which appear Hb 11:3 (Ar. 1, 5 πάντων τῶν φαινομένων; Ath. 5, 2; cp. Sext. Emp., Hypotyp. 1, 138). Ign. explains: I will be a real believer ὅταν κόσμῳ μὴ φαίνωμαι when I am no longer visibly present in the world (because I have been devoured by the wild beasts) IRo 3:2. A play on words is meant to make this clear: Christ also, through the fact that he is ἐν πατρί and hence no longer visibly present in the world, μᾶλλον φαίνεται is all the more plainly visible as that which he really is, i.e. ὁ θεὸς ἡμῶν 3:3b. τ̣ὸ̣ [τέλο]ς (or: τ̣ε̣[λο]ς) τῶν φαινο[μέ]νων (opp. ἀφανῶν) light of things seen Ox 1081, 29f (rev. rdg.; s. διέρχομαι 1bβ); ἡ πίστ[ις] εὑρ[ετ]έ̣ [α] ἡ φαινομένη τοῦ ἀ.[ … ι]κ̣οῦ πατρός 32–34 (s. ἀπατρικός, but also ἀγέννητος, the preferred restoration being ἀγ[εννή]τ̣ου on the basis of the Coptic).
    ⓑ make one’s appearance, show oneself (Diod S 4, 6, 5 θεὸν φαίνεσθαι παρʼ ἀνθρώποις; 5, 2, 4 [divinity]; Chariton 5, 7, 10 φάνηθι, δαῖμον ἀγαθέ; Sb 8141, 24 [ins I B.C.] δαίμονος τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ υἱὸς … ἐφάνη; ParJer 7:20 θεὸς … ἐφάνη ἡμῖν διὰ τοῦ αἰέτου τούτου; SibOr 5, 152; Just., A I, 63, 10; ἐφάνη ὁ θεὸς … ἄλλως ἄλλοις Iren. 1, 10, 3 [Harv. I, 95, 9]; Did., Gen. 225, 13; τοῦ Ἰησοῦ … φαινομένου Just., D. 88, 8) Hv 1, 4, 3. Elijah (Jos., Ant. 8, 319) ἐφάνη has made his appearance (as forerunner of God’s kingdom, Mal 3:22. Some people consider that Jesus is Elijah come again) Lk 9:8. ἕως ἐφάνη βρέφος until the child (Jesus) appeared (in ref. to his birth in a cave) GJs 19:2. Of the first advent of Jesus Christ, who comes from outside our world B 14:5; IMg 6:1; Dg 11:2; also w. dat. (X., Cyr. 1, 6, 43; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 20, 5; Ael. Aristid. 51, 25 K.=27 p. 540 D.: ἡ θεὸς ἐφάνη μοι) κόσμῳ 11:3. Of the risen Lord, w. dat. Mk 16:9 (Just., D. 67, 7) τοῖς ἀποστόλοις. Of an angel, w. dat. (2 Macc 3:33; 10:29) Mt 1:20 (GJs 14:2); 2:13, 19 (cp. Alcaeus L-P. [schol. on Nicander, Ther. 613 p. 48 Keil]: φανῆναι τὸν Ἀπόλλωνα καθʼ ὕπνους; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 289 κατὰ τοὺς ὕπνους ἡ ῏Ισις ἐφάνη τῷ Ἀ., Ant. 7, 147; 8, 196). ὄπως φανῶσιν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις in order to be seen by people Mt 6:5; w. ptc. to denote the role that one plays before people (Hyperid., Fgm. 70, 1; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 4, 1; Ael. Aristid. 47 p. 428 D.) νηστεύοντες as fasting vs. 16; cp. 18 (B-D-F §414, 3).—Of the Antichrist φανήσεται ὡς υἱὸς θεοῦ he will appear (in the same way) as a son of God D 16:4.—Of earthly persons: ὅπου ἄν φανῇ ὁ ἐπίσκοπος, ἐκεῖ τὸ πλῆθος ἔστω ISm 8:2. Of participation in a meeting διὰ τί οὐκ ἐφάνης τῇ συνόδῳ ἡμῶν GJs 15:1. Παῦλος φανεῖς πᾶσι εἶπεν Paul showed himself (after his martyrdom) to all and said AcPl Ha 11, 5.
    ③ to become known, be recognized, be apparent, be revealed, pass. φαίνομαι w. act./intr. sense
    ⓐ w. predicate nom. εἰ ἦσαν, ἐφαίνοντο ἂν κλάδοι τοῦ σταυροῦ if they (the bogus teachers) actually were (God’s planting), they would appear as branches of the cross ITr 11:2. οὐ φαίνονται they are not apparent Hs 3:2ab, 3ab. ἡ ἁμαρτία ἵνα φανῇ ἁμαρτία in order that sin might be recognized as sin Ro 7:13.
    ⓑ appear to the eyes of the spirit, be revealed ὅπερ καὶ φανήσεται πρὸ προσώπου ἡμῶν, ἐξ ὧν ἀγαπῶμεν αὐτόν which also will be revealed before our face by the fact that we love (the Lord) IEph 15:3.
    ④ to be known by appearance as opposed to underlying reality, appear as someth., appear to be someth., pass. φαίνομαι w. act./intr. sense made more definite by a predicate nom. (X., Cyr. 1, 4, 19; Cebes 5, 1; Arrian, Anab. 4, 30, 4 πιστὸς ἐφαίνετο=he showed himself to be trustworthy; TestReub 5:7; Iren. 5, 1, 2 [Harv. II 315, 5]; Theoph. Ant. 3, 7 [p. 218, 5]) φαίνονται ὡραῖοι Mt 23:27. ἵνα ἡμεῖς δόκιμοι φανῶμεν 2 Cor 13:7. W. dat. of pers. appear to someone as someth. (Lucian, Dial. Mort. 25, 1; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 7 [Stone p. 54]) φαίνεσθε τοῖς ἀνθρώποις δίκαιοι Mt 23:28 (cp. Pr 21:2). W. ἐνώπιόν τινος instead of the dat.: ἐφάνησαν ἐνώπιον αὐτῶν ὡσεὶ λῆρος τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα Lk 24:11.—Foll. by ὡς look as if (TestJos 3:4) Hv 3, 2, 6b; Hs 9, 9, 7.
    ⑤ to make an impression on the mind, have the appearance, seem, freq. w. focus on aspect of decision evoked by circumstance; pass. φαίνομαι w. act./intr. sense, w. dat. and inf. (Hom. et al.) οἱ τοιοῦτοι οὐκ εὐσυνείδητοί μοι εἶναι φαίνονται IMg 4. W. dat. and ptc. φαίνεσθέ μοι κατὰ ἀνθρώπους ζῶντες ITr 2:1. τί ὑμῖν φαίνεται; how does it seem to you? what is your decision? Mk 14:64. ἐάν σοι φανῇ if it seems good to you Hv 2, 3, 4 (acc. to CTurner, JTS 21, 1920, 198, a Latinism: si tibi videtur. Cp. POxy 811 [I A.D.] εἴ σοι φαίνεται). Without a dat. (Jos., C. Ap. 1, 12; Just., D. 91, 4) οὐδὲν φαίνεται κεκομμένον ἀπʼ αὐτοῦ nothing seems to have been cut from it (the tree) or apparently nothing has been cut from it (cp. Aristoxenus, Fgm. 83 φαίνεται Ὄλυμπος αὐξήσας μουσικήν=O. has apparently enriched music) Hs 8, 3, 1 (φαίνεται w. acc. and inf. Demetrius: 722 Fgm. 5 Jac.).—B. 1045f.—DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > φαίνω

  • 68 ἵνα

    ἵνα (Hom.+) conjunction, the use of which increased considerably in H. Gk. as compared w. earlier times because it came to be used periphrastically for the inf. and impv. B-D-F §369; 379; 388–94 al.; Mlt. index; Rob. index.
    ① marker to denote purpose, aim, or goal, in order that, that, final sense
    ⓐ w. subjunctive, not only after a primary tense, but also (in accordance w. Hellenistic usage) after a secondary tense (B-D-F §369, 1; Rob. 983; Mlt-Turner 100–102; JKnuenz, De enuntiatis Graecorum finalibus 1913, 15ff):
    α. after a present tense Mk 4:21; 7:9; Lk 6:34; 8:16; J 3:15; 5:34; 6:30; Ac 2:25 (Ps 15:8); 16:30; Ro 1:11; 3:19; 11:25; 1 Cor 9:12; Gal 6:13; Phil 3:8; Hb 5:1; 6:12; 1J 1:3 and oft.
    β. after a perfect Mt 1:22; 21:4; J 5:23, 36; 6:38; 12:40, 46; 14:29; 16:1, 4; 17:4; 1 Cor 9:22b al.
    γ. after a pres. or aor. impv. Mt 7:1; 14:15; 17:27; 23:26; Mk 11:25; J 4:15; 5:14; 10:38; 1 Cor 7:5; 11:34; 1 Ti 4:15; Tit 3:13. Likew. after the hortatory subj. in the first pers. pl. Mk 1:38; Lk 20:14; J 11:16; Hb 4:16.
    δ. after a fut. Lk 16:4; 18:5; J 5:20; 14:3, 13, 16; 1 Cor 15:28; Phil 1:26.
    ε. after a secondary tense: impf. Mk 3:2; 6:41; 8:6; Lk 6:7; 18:15 al.—Plpf. J 4:8.—Aor. Mt 19:13; Mk 3:14; 11:28; 14:10; Lk 19:4, 15; J 7:32; 12:9; Ro 7:4; 2 Cor 8:9; Hb 2:14; 11:35; 1J 3:5.
    ⓑ w. fut. ind. (LXX e.g. Sus 28; En 15:5; TestSol 13:7; SIG 888, 87ff; OGI 665, 35; POxy 299; 1071, 5 ἵνα ποιήσουσιν καὶ πέμψουσιν; Gen 16:2 [Swete; ARahlfs, Genesis 1926 v.l.] al.; Just., D. 115, 6), beside which the aor. subj. is usu. found in the mss. (B-D-F §369, 2; Rob. 984; Mlt-Turner 100) ἵνα σταυρώσουσιν Mk 15:20 v.l. ἵνα ἐρεῖ σοι Lk 14:10. ἵνα δώσουσιν 20:10. ἵνα θεωρήσουσιν J 7:3. ἵνα δώσει 17:2 v.l.; Rv 8:3. ἐπισκιάσει Ac 5:15 v.l.; ξυρήσονται 21:24. κερδανῶ 1 Cor 9:21 v.l.; καυθήσομαι 13:3 v.l. καταδουλώσουσιν Gal 2:4. κερδηθήσονται 1 Pt 3:1. ἵνα … δηλώσεις Hv 3, 8, 10. The fut. ind. is also used oft. when ἵνα has no final mng., esp. in Rv: 1 Cor 9:18 (ἵνα as answer, as Epict. 4, 1, 99); Rv 6:4, 11; 9:4, 5, 20; 13:12; 14:13; 22:14. Occasionally the fut. ind. and aor. subj. are found in the same sentence Rv 3:9; cp. also Phil 2:10f v.l. (on this interchange s. Reinhold 106; JVogeser, Zur Sprache d. griech. Heiligenlegenden, diss. Munich 1907, 34f; Knuenz, op. cit. 23ff; 39; Dio Chrys. 26 [43], 7 ἵνα μὴ παρῶ … μηδὲ ἕξουσιν; POxy 1068, 5 ἵνα διαπέμψεται, ἵνα δυνηθῶ …).—On the interchange of pres. subj. and fut. ind. in J 15:8 s. GLee, Biblica 51, ’70, 239f.
    ⓒ ἵνα is found w. the pres. ind. only in passages where the subj. is also attested in the mss.; its presence is prob. due to corruption of the text (B-D-F §369, 6; Rob. 984f; Mlt-Turner 100f. But see the clear instance in PAnt III, 188, 15: ἵνα μή ἐσμεν, and cp. BGU 1081, 3 ἐχάρην, ἵνα σὲ ἀσπάζομαι; TestNapht 8:2; PassPtPl 60 [Aa I, 170, 8] ἵνα κατευθύνει; AcPtPl 58 [Aa I, 203, 17]; AcPlTh 11 [Aa I, 243, 11 v.l.]). φυσιοῦσθε 1 Cor 4:6 and ζηλοῦτε Gal 4:17 could be subj. (B-D-F §91; Rob. 984). But Gal 6:12 v.l. διώκονται; Tit 2:4 v.l. σωφρονίζουσιν; J 5:20 v.l. θαυμάζετε; 17:3 v.l. γινώσκουσιν; 1J 5:20 v.l. γινώσκομεν; Rv 12:6 v.l. τρέφουσιν; 13:17 v.l. δύναται; ἵνα σύνετε B 6:5 v.l. (in text συνιῆτε; v.l. συνῆτε); ἵνα … ᾂδετε IEph 4:2 (Lghtf. ᾂδητε); μετέχετε ibid. (v.l. μετέχητε). διατάσσομαι ITr 3:3 (v.l. διατάσσωμαι). βλασφημεῖται 8:2 v.l.
    ⓓ The opt. after ἵνα is not used in our lit. (B-D-F §369, 1; 386, 3; Rob. 983). Mk 12:2 v.l. ἵνα λάβοι (for λάβῃ). Eph 1:17 ἵνα δῴη (v.l. δῷ) is certainly subj., and δώῃ is the correct rdg. (B-D-F §95, 2; Mlt. 196f). Likew. ἵνα παραδοῖ J 13:2.
    ⓔ after a demonstrative (Epict. 2, 5, 16 ἐν τούτῳ … ἵνα) εἰς τοῦτο for this (purpose, namely) that J 18:37; 1J 3:8; Ro 14:9; 2 Cor 2:9; 1 Pt 3:9; 4:6; B 5:1, 11; 14:5. εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο for this very purpose, that Eph 6:22; Col 4:8. διὰ τοῦτο for this reason … that (Himerius, Or. 14, 3) 2 Cor 13:10; Phlm 15; 1 Ti 1:16; the ἵνα clause can also precede διὰ τοῦτο J 1:31. τούτου χάριν … ἵνα for this reason … that Tit 1:5.
    ⓕ ἵνα with ‘I should like to say this’ supplied is found also in earlier Gk (Soph. Ph. 989) Mk 2:10 (B-D-F §470, 3. Differently [a virtual impv.] DSharp, ET 38, 1927, 427f). The necessary supplement precedes in ἵνα δείξῃ (he said this), in order to show B 7:5.—Cp. J 15:13.
    ② marker of objective, that. Very oft. the final mng. is greatly weakened or disappears altogether. In this case the ἵνα-constr. serves as a substitute for an inf. that supplements a verb, or an acc. w. inf. (cp. Od. 3, 327 and a spurious document in Demosth. 18, 155. Later very common, also in ins, pap [Rdm.2 191ff]; LXX).
    ⓐ after verbs w. the sense
    α. ‘wish, desire, strive’ (PGiss 17, 5 [II A.D.] ἠγωνίασα … ἵνα ἀκούσω; BGU 1081, 3 ἐχάρην, ἵνα σὲ ἀσπάζομαι) θέλειν ἵνα (TestAbr A 19, 101, 9 [Stone p. 50]) Mt 7:12; Mk 9:30; 10:35; Lk 6:31; J 17:24; 1 Cor 14:5. βουλεύεσθαι J 11:53; 12:10. συμβουλεύεσθαι Mt 26:4. συντίθεσθαι J 9:22. ἀγαλλιᾶσθαι joyfully strive after 8:56 (s. ἀγαλλιάω). ζητεῖν 1 Cor 4:2; 14:12; AcPlCor 2:8. ζηλοῦν 14:1. εὔχεσθαι ‘wish’ IPhld 6:3.
    β. ‘take care, be ashamed, be afraid’ φυλάσσεσθαι 2 Pt 3:17. προσέχειν take care that B 16:8. βλέπειν see to it, that 1 Cor 16:10.
    γ. ‘request, demand’: δεῖσθαι request (Dionys. Hal. 4, 12, 1; Lucian, Dom. 9; Jos., Ant. 6, 321; 12, 125 al.) Lk 9:40; 21:36; 22:32; B 12:7; Pol 6:2; Hv 3, 1, 2; Hs 5, 4, 1. ἐρωτᾶν request (s. ἐρωτάω 2) Mk 7:26; Lk 7:36; 16:27; J 4:47; 17:15 al. (JEarwaker, ET 75, ’64, 316f so interprets the third ἵνα in 17:21). παρακαλεῖν request, exhort (EpArist 318; 321, Jos., Ant. 14, 168) Mt 14:36; Mk 5:18; 6:56; 7:32; 8:22; Lk 8:32; 1 Cor 1:10 al. αἰτεῖσθαι Col 1:9 (Just., D. 30, 2 αἰτοῦμεν). προσεύχεσθαι Mt 24:20; 26:41; Mk 14:35; Lk 22:46; 1 Cor 14:13 al. εὔχεσθαι pray (s. εὔχομαι 1 end) Hs 5, 2, 10. εὐχαριστεῖν Eph 1:16f. ἀξιοῦν demand, request (CIG 4892, 13 [III A.D.]; Jos., Ant. 14, 22) Hv 4, 1, 3. καταξιοῦν ISm 11:1; IPol 7:2.
    δ. ‘summon, encourage, order’ (Epict, 4, 11, 29; 1 Esdr 8:19; EpArist 46) ἀπαγγέλλειν Mt 28:10. παραγγέλλειν (CIG 4957, 48 [68 A.D.] restored) Mk 6:8. διαμαρτύρεσθαι 1 Ti 5:21. ἐντέλλεσθαι (Jos., Ant. 7, 356) Mk 13:34; J 15:17. κηρύσσειν Mk 6:12. διαστέλλεσθαι Mt 16:20; Mk 5:43; 7:36; 9:9. ἐπιτιμᾶν warn Mt 16:20; 20:31; Mk 8:30; 10:48; Lk 18:39. ἐξορκίζειν Mt 26:63. ὁρκίζειν Hs 9, 10, 5. λέγειν order Mt 4:3; 20:21; Mk 3:9; 9:18; Lk 4:3; 10:40; Hv 2, 2, 6. γράφειν write (Jos., Ant. 11, 7; 127) Mk 9:12; 12:19; Lk 20:28. ἀποστέλλειν Ac 16:36.
    ε. ‘cause, bring about’ πείθειν Mt 27:20. ποιεῖν J 11:37; Col 4:16; cp. Rv 3:9; 13:16. τιθέναι appoint J 15:16. ἀγγαρεύειν Mt 27:32; Mk 15:21.
    ζ. ‘permit, grant’ ἀφιέναι Mk 11:16. On J 12:7 s. CBarrett, The Gospel According to St. John2, ’78, 413–14. διδόναι 10:37; Rv 9:5.
    η. συνευδοκεῖν Hs 5, 2, 8.
    ⓑ after impers. expr.: ἀρκετόν (ἐστι) it is sufficient Mt 10:25. λυσιτελεῖ (εἰ … ἢ ἵνα) Lk 17:2. συμφέρει Mt 5:29f; 18:6; J 11:50. ἐμοὶ εἰς ἐλάχιστόν ἐστιν it is a matter of little consequence to me 1 Cor 4:3. ἔδει B 5:13. πολλὰ λείπει Hv 3, 1, 9.
    ⓒ after nouns and adjs., esp. when they are parts of fixed expressions:
    α. χρείαν ἔχειν J 2:25; 16:30; 1J 2:27. ἔστιν συνήθεια J 18:39. θέλημά ἐστιν Mt 18:14; J 6:40; 1 Cor 16:12b. βουλὴ ἐγένετο Ac 27:42. ἐντολή (cp. Polyb. 36, 17, 10 νόμος) J 15:12; 11:57; 13:34; Ac 17:15; 2J 6. δέησις Eph 6:19. ἐξουσία Ac 8:19. ἐμὸν βρῶμά ἐστιν J 4:34. τίς ἐστιν ὁ μισθός; ἵνα … 1 Cor 9:18.
    β. οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανός Mt 8:8; Lk 7:6. οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος J 1:27; cp. Hs 9, 28, 5. S. B-D-F §379; Rob. 996.
    ⓓ after nouns mng. time: χρόνον διδόναι, ἵνα give time Rv 2:21. ἔρχεται ἡ ὥρα the time comes (Aesop, Fab. 242 H. ἡ ἡμέρα, ἵνα=the day on which) J 12:23; 13:1; 16:2, 32. S. B-D-F §382, 1; 393.
    ⓔ ἵνα can also take the place of the explanatory inf. after a demonstrative (B-D-F §394; Rdm.2 192.—Wsd 13:9; Just., D. 14, 2 τοῦτο γάρ ἐστι τὸ σύμβολον τῶν ἀζύμων, ἵνα μὴ …) Mk 11:28. πόθεν μοι τοῦτο ἵνα ἔλθῃ (for τὸ ἐλθεῖν τὴν κτλ.) Lk 1:43 (cp. GJs 12:2). τοῦτο προσεύχομαι ἵνα Phil 1:9. cp. 1 Cor 9:18. This is a favorite usage in J: τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ ἔργον τοῦ θεοῦ ἵνα πιστεύητε (for τὸ πιστεύειν ὑμᾶς) 6:29; cp. vs. 50. μείζονα ταύτης ἀγάπην οὐδεὶς ἔχει ἵνα … θῇ (for τοῦ θεῖναι) 15:13; cp. 3J 4.—J 6:39; 17:3; 1J 3:11, 23; 4:21; 5:3; 2J 6a. ἐν τούτῳ: ἐν τούτῳ ἐδοξάσθη ὁ πατήρ μου ἵνα … φέρητε (for ἐν τῷ φέρειν ὑμᾶς ἐδοξάσθη) J 15:8; cp. 1J 4:17.—S. also Hs 9, 28, 4, and ποταπὴν ἀγάπην ἵνα 1J 3:1.
    ⓕ ἵνα is used elliptically ἀλλʼ ἵνα but this has happened that, where the verb to be supplied must be inferred fr. the context (Epict. 1, 12, 17): ἀλλʼ ἵνα μαρτυρήσῃ (sc. ἦλθεν) J 1:8. ἀλλʼ (ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον) ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν but it was hidden that it might be revealed Mk 4:22 (but cp. CCadoux, JTS 42, ’41, 169 n. 3). ἀλλʼ (κρατεῖτέ με) ἵνα πληρωθῶσιν but you are holding me (prisoner), that 14:49. ἀλλʼ (ἐγένετο τυφλὸς) ἵνα φανερωθῇ J 9:3. ἀλλʼ (ἀποθνῄσκει) ἵνα … συναγάγῃ 11:52.—13:18; Hv 3, 8, 10 (cp. 1b above).
    ⓖ ἵνα w. subjunctive as a periphrasis for the impv. (B-D-F §387, 3; Mlt. 178; 210f; 248; Rob. 994; Mlt-Turner 94f; FSlotty, D. Gebr. des Konj. u. Opt. in d. griech. Dialekten I 1915, 35; CCadoux, The Impv. Use of ἵνα in the NT: JTS 42, ’41, 165–73; in reply HMeecham, JTS 43, ’42, 179f, also ET 52, ’40/41, 437; AGeorge, JTS 45, ’44, 56–60. Goodsp., Probs. 57f.—Soph., Oed. Col. 155; Epict. 4, 1, 41, Enchir. 17; PTebt 408, 17 [3 A.D.]; BGU 1079, 20; PFay 112, 12; POxy 299, 5 ἵνʼ εἰδῇς ‘know’; PGM 4, 2135; Tob 8:12 BA; 2 Macc 1:9. ἵνα πρὶν τούτων ἴδητε τὴν ἀπώλειαν τῶν υἱῶν ‘before these events, you shall behold the destruction of your sons’ En 14:6. κύριε, ἵνα γινώσκῃ τὸ σὸν κράτος ὅτι ‘Lord, may you in your majesty know, that …’ TestAbr A 4 p. 80, 35f [Stone pp. 8 and 10]). ἵνα ἐπιθῇς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῇ please lay your hands on her Mk 5:23. ἡ δὲ γυνὴ ἵνα φοβῆται τ. ἄνδρα the wife is to respect her husband Eph 5:33. Cp. Mt 20:33; Mk 10:51; 1 Cor 7:29; 16:16; 2 Cor 8:7; Gal 2:10. ἵνα ἀναπαήσονται let them rest Rv 14:13. W. θέλω: θέλω ἵνα δῷς Mk 6:25 (=δός Mt 14:8.).—On Mk 2:10 s. 1f above.
    ⓗ ἵνα without a finite verb, which can be supplied fr. the context (Epict. 3, 23, 4 ἵνα ὡς ἄνθρωπος, i.e. ἐργάζῃ) ἵνα ἡμεῖς εἰς τὰ ἔθνη, αὐτοὶ δὲ εἰς τὴν περιτομήν (i.e. εὐαγγελιζώμεθα and εὐαγγελίζωνται) Gal 2:9. ἵνα κατὰ χάριν (γένηται) Ro 4:16. ἵνα ἄλλοις ἄνεσις (γένηται) 2 Cor 8:13. ἵνα (γένηται) καθὼς γέγραπται 1 Cor 1:31 (B-D-F §481; Rob. 1202f).
    ③ marker serving as substitute for the inf. of result, so that (‘ecbatic’ or consecutive use of ἵνα: B-D-F §391, 5; Mlt. 206–9; Rob. 997–99 and in SCase, Studies in Early Christianity [Porter-Bacon Festschr.] 1928, 51–57; EBlakeney, ET 53, ’41/42, 377f, indicating that the result is considered probable, but not actual. But this distinction is not always strictly observed. Cp. Epict. 1, 24, 3; 25, 15; 27, 8 al.; 2, 2, 16 οὕτω μωρὸς ἦν, ἵνα μὴ ἴδῃ; Vett. Val. 185, 31; 186, 17; 292, 20; Jos., Bell. 6, 107; Just., D. 112, 5; PLond III, 964, 13 p. 212 [II/III A.D.]. Many exx. in AJannaris, An Historical Greek Grammar 1897 §1758 and 1951) ἦν παρακεκαλυμμένον ἀπʼ αὐτῶν ἵνα μὴ αἴσθωνται αὐτό it was concealed from them, so that they might not comprehend it Lk 9:45. τίς ἥμαρτεν, ἵνα τυφλὸς γεννηθῇ; Who sinned, so that he was born blind? J 9:2. Cp. 2 Cor 1:17; Gal 5:17; 1 Th 5:4; 1J 1:9; Rv 9:20; 13:13; Hs 7:2; 9, 1, 10.—In many cases purpose and result cannot be clearly differentiated, and hence ἵνα is used for the result that follows according to the purpose of the subj. or of God. As in Semitic and Gr-Rom. thought, purpose and result are identical in declarations of the divine will (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 16, 10 the rule of the Persian king is being overthrown by the deity ἵνα Δαρεῖος … φυγὰς γενόμενος κτλ. Here ἵνα means both ‘in order that’ and ‘so that’): Lk 11:50; J 4:36; 12:40; 19:28; Ro 3:19; 5:20; 7:13; 8:17; 11:31f al. (ESutcliffe, Effect or Purpose, Biblica 35, ’54, 320–27). The formula ἵνα πληρωθῇ is so to be understood, since the fulfillment is acc. to God’s plan of salvation: Mt 1:22; 2:15; 4:14; 12:17; 21:4; 26:56; J 12:38; 17:12; 19:24, 36.—The ἵνα of Mk 4:12=Lk 8:10, so much in dispute, is prob. to be taken as final (w. AvVeldhuizen, NTS 8, 1925, 129–33; 10, 1927, 42–44; HWindisch, ZNW 26, 1927, 203–9; JGnilka, Die Verstockung Israels ’61, 45–48; B-D-F §369, 2 [here, and B-D-R p. 386f n. 2, the lit. on ‘causal’ ἵνα, which is allowed at least for Rv 22:14 and perh. 14:13, where P47 has ὅτι; see 2g]. S. also FLaCava, Scuola Cattol. 65, ’37, 301–4; MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 211–16; ISluiter, Causal ἵνα, Sound Greek: Glotta 70, ’92, 39–53. On J 12:7 s. τηρέω 2a).
    ④ marker of retroactive emphasis, that. At times, contrary to regular usage, ἵνα is placed elsewhere than at the beginning of its clause, in order to emphasize the words that come before it (B-D-F §475, 1; cp. the position of ὅτι Gal 1:11): τὴν ἀγάπην ἵνα γνῶτε 2 Cor 2:4. εἰς τὸν ἐρχόμενον μετʼ αὐτὸν ἵνα πιστεύσωσιν Ac 19:4. τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἐλέει ἵνα Ro 11:31. Cp. J 13:29; 1 Cor 7:29; Gal 2:10; Col 4:16b.—EStauffer, Ἵνα u. d. Problem d. teleol. Denkens b. Pls: StKr 102, 1930, 232–57; JGreenlee, ἵνα Substantive Clauses in the NT: Asbury Seminarian 2, ’47, 154–63; HRiesenfeld, Zu d. johanneischen ἵνα-Sätzen, StTh 19, ’65, 213–20; MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 76–81.—Frisk. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἵνα

  • 69 σύν

    σύν [pron. full] [ῠ], old [dialect] Att. [full] ξύν; [dialect] Boeot. [full] σούν IG7.3171.39 (Orchom. [dialect] Boeot., iii B.C.): Prep. with dat. (rarely c. gen., σ. τῶν ἐν αὺτῷ νεκρῶν Mitteis Chr.129.23 (ii B.C.);
    A

    σ. ἡρώων IPE2.383

     ([place name] Phanagoria); σ. γυναικός ib.301 ([place name] Panticapaeum), cf. Ostr.240.5 (ii A.D.), PLond.1.113 iv 19 (vi A.D.)):—with. The form ξύν rarely occurs in Hom., though it is not rare in compds. even when not required by the metre, as in ξυνέαξα, ξυνοχῇσιν, ξύμβλητο, ξύμπαντα; Hes. also uses ξύμπας, ξυνιέναι; in [dialect] Ion. verse we find

    ξύν Thgn.1063

     (but

    σύν Id.50

    ), Sol. 19.3 (perh. old Attic), but

    σύν Archil.4

    , cf. ξυνωνίη, συνίημι; in early [dialect] Ion. Prose (including Inscrr., cf. SIG1.2 (Abu Simbel, vi B.C.), 167.37 (Mylasa, iv B.C.), etc.) ξύν is only found in

    ξυνίημι Heraclit.51

    , Democr.95 (cf. ἀξύνετος, ἀξυνεσίη, ξύνεσις), and in the phrase ξὺν νῷ ( νόῳ codd.) Heraclit.114, Democr.35; Hdt. has only σύν, and in codd. Hp. ξύν has weaker authority than σύν (i p.cxxv Kuehlewein); in the late Ionic of Aret., ξύν prevails over σύν; in [dialect] Aeol. and [dialect] Dor. it is rare,

    ξυνοίκην Sapph.75

    ;

    ξυναλίαξε Ar.Lys.93

    ; elsewh. [dialect] Dor. σύν, Leg.Gort. 5.6, IG9(1).334.47 ([dialect] Locr., v B.C.), etc.; but in old [dialect] Att. Inscrr. ξύν is the only form up to 500 B.C.; σύν appears in v B.C. and becomes usual towards the end; after 378 B.C. ξύν survives only in the formula γνώμην δὲ ξυμβάλλεσθαι κτλ.; the phrase ξὺν νῷ is found in Ar.Nu. 580, Pl.Cri. 48c, Men. 88b, R. 619b (

    σὺν E.Or. 909

    ); otherwise, of [dialect] Att. Prose writers Th. alone uses the preposition ξύν, Antipho and Lysias have ξυν- a few times in compds.; codd. Pl. have both ξυν- (Lg. 930a, al.) and συν-; in Antipho Soph.Oxy.1364, Aristox., Arr., Ael., and Anon.Rhythm. ξυν- is very freq.; in Trag. both forms occur. The Prep. σύν gradually gave way to μετά with gen., so that whereas A. has 67 examples of σύν to 8 of μετά with gen., the proportions in Th. are 400 of μετά to 37 of σύν, in D. 346 of μετά to 15 of σύν, and in Arist. 300 of μετά to 8 of σύν: for these and other statistics see C. J. T. Mommsen, Beiträge zur Lehre von den griechischen Präpositionen (Frankfurt 1886-95): in [dialect] Att. Prose and Com. σύν is restricted for the most part to signf. 8, 9 and a few phrases, such as σὺν θεῷ, σὺν (τοῖς) ὅπλοις; Xenophon uses it freely, having 556 examples to 275 of μετά; in Pap., NT, and later Prose its use is much less restricted (v. infr.).
    1 in company with, together with,

    δεῦρό ποτ' ἤλυθε.. σ. Μενελάῳ Il.3.206

    ;

    ξ. παιδὶ.. πύργῳ ἐφεστήκει 6.372

    ;

    σ. τοῖσδε ὑπέκφυγον Od.9.286

    ;

    καταφθίσθαι σ. ἐκείνῳ 2.183

    ;

    ἀπελαύνειν σ. τῷ στρατῷ Hdt.8.101

    ;

    ἐπαιδεύετο σ. τῷ ἀδελφῷ X.An.1.9.2

    ;

    σ. αὐτῷ σταυροῦσι δύο λῃστάς Ev.Marc.15.27

    ;

    οὐδένα ἔχω σ. ἐμοί PSI10.1161.12

     (iv A.D.).
    2 with collat. notion of help or aid, σ. θεῷ with God's help or blessing, as God wills, Il.9.49;

    σ. σοί, πότνα θεά Od.13.391

    ;

    πέμψον δέ με σ. γε θεοῖσιν Il.24.430

    , cf. 15.26;

    σ. θεῷ φυτευθεὶς ὄλβος Pi.N.8.17

    ; σ. θεῷ εἰρημένον spoken as by inspiration, Hdt.1.86;

    σ. θεῷ δ' εἰρήσεται Ar.Pl. 114

    ;

    σ. θεῷ εἰπεῖν Pl.Tht. 151b

    , Prt. 317b;

    ξ. θεοῖς Th.1.86

    ; so σ. δαίμονι, σ. Ἀθήνῃ καὶ Διί, Il.11.792, 20.192;

    σ. Χαρίτεσσιν Pi.N.9.54

    , cf. P.9.2;

    ξ. τῷ θεῷ πᾶς καὶ γελᾷ κὠδύρεται S.Aj. 383

    ; also θεοῦ σ. παλάμᾳ, σ. θεοῦ τύχᾳ, Pi.O.10(11).21, N.6.24: generally, of personal cooperation, σ. σοὶ φραζέσθω let him consult with you, Il.9.346;

    λοχησάμενος σ. ἑταίρῳ Od.13.268

    ; ξ. τῇ βουλῇ in consultation with the Council, IG12.63.17; σ. τινὶ μάχεσθαι fight at his side, X.Cyr.5.3.5, cf. HG4.1.34; σ. τινὶ εἶναι or γίγνεσθαι to be with another, i.e.on his side, of his party, Id.An.3.1.21, Smp.5.10; οἱ σ. αὐτῷ his friends, followers, Id.An.1.2.15, cf. Act.Ap.14.4, etc.
    3 furnished with, endued with,

    σ. μεγάλῃ ἀρετῇ ἐκτήσω ἄκοιτιν Od.24.193

    ;

    πόλιν θεοδμάτῳ σ. ἐλευθερίᾳ ἔκτισσε Pi.P.1.61

    .
    4 of things that belong, or are attached, to a person, σ. νηΐ or σ. νηυσί, i.e. on board ship, Il.1.389, 179, etc.; σ. νηυσὶν ἀλαπάξαι, opp. πεζός, 9.328 (so in Prose,

    σ. ναυσὶ προσπλεῖν X.HG2.2.7

    , etc.);

    σ. ἵπποισιν καὶ ὄχεσφιν Il.5.219

    ; esp. of arms,

    μιν κατέκηε σ. ἔντεσι 6.418

    ;

    στῆ δ' εὐρὰξ σ. δουρί 15.541

    ; ἀντιβίην or ἀντίβιον σ. ἔντεσι or σ. τεύχεσι πειρηθῆναι, 5.220, 11.386;

    σ. ἔντεσι μάρνασθαι 13.719

    ;

    σκῆπτρον, σ. τῷ ἔβη 2.47

    ; ἄγγελος ἦλθε.. σ. ἀγγελίῃ ib. 787; ς. (or ξ.)

    ὅπλοις Th.2.2

    , al., Pl.Lg. 947c, Aen.Tact.17.1; ς. (or ξ.)

    τοῖς ὅπλοις Th.2.90

    , 4.14, Hell.Oxy. 10.1, Pl.Lg. 763a, Aen.Tact.11.8;

    σ. ἐγχειριδίοις Hell.Oxy.10.2

    ;

    ξ. ξιφιδίῳ καὶ θώρακι Th.3.22

    ;

    ξ. ἑνὶ ἱματίῳ Id.2.70

    ; in some such cases ς. is little more than expletive, as σ. τεύχεσι θωρηχθέντες ll.8.530, etc.: with αὐτός (cf.

    αὐτός 1.5

    ), chiefly in Hom.,

    ἀνόρουσεν αὐτῇ σ. φόρμιγγι Il.9.194

    , cf. 14.498;

    αὐτῷ σ. τε λίνῳ καὶ ῥήγεϊ Od.13.118

    .
    5 of things accompanying, or of concurrent circumstances,

    ἄνεμος σ. λαίλαπι Il.17.57

    , cf. Od.12.408; of coincidence in time,

    ἄκρᾳ σ. ἑσπέρᾳ Pi.P.11.10

    ; καιρῷ σ. ἀτρεκεῖ ib.8.7;

    σ. τῷ Χρόνῳ προϊόντι X.Cyr.8.7.6

    ; in the course of,

    κείνῳ σ. ἄματι B.10.23

    , cf. 125, Pi.Fr. 123.
    6 of necessary connexion or consequence, σὺν μεγάλῳ ἀποτεῖσαι to pay with a great loss, i.e. suffer greatly, Il.4.161; δημοσίῳ σ. κακῷ with loss to the public, Thgn.50; σ. τῷ σῷ ἀγαθῷ to your advantage, X.Cyr.3.1.15; ὤλοντο.. σὺν μιάς ματι with pollution, S.Ant. 172; to denote agreement, in accordance with,

    σ. τῷ δικαίῳ καὶ καλῷ X.An.2.6.18

    ;

    σ. δίκᾳ Pi.P.9.96

    ;

    σ. κόσμῳ Hdt.8.86

    , Arist.Mu. 398b23;

    σ. τάχει S.El. 872

    , etc.
    7 of the instrument or means, with the help of, by means of,

    σ. ἐλαίῳ φαρμακώσαισα Pi.P.4.221

    ;

    διήλλαχθε σ. σιδάρῳ A.Th. 885

     (lyr.);

    πλοῦτον ἐκτήσω ξ. αἰχμῇ Id.Pers. 755

     (troch.);

    ἡ [τῶν φίλων] κτῆσίς ἐστιν οὐδαμῶς σ. τῇ βίᾳ X.Cyr.8.7.13

    ;

    ξ. ἐπαίνῳ Th.1.84

    .
    8 including,

    κεφάλαιον σ. ἐπωνίοις IG12.329.5

    , cf. 22.1388.85, 1407.12, al.;

    τοῦ Πειραιῶς ξ. Μουνυχίᾳ Th.2.13

    , cf. 4.124, 5.26, 74, 7.42, 8.90, 95; δισχίλιαι γάρ εἰσι (sc. δραχμαὶ)

    σ. ταῖς Νικίου Ar.Fr. 100

    ;

    ἀνήλωσα σ. τῇ τῆς σκευῆς ἀναθέσει ἑκκαίδεκα μνᾶς Lys.21.4

    , cf. 2;

    αἶγας ἀπέδοτο σ. τῷ αἰπόλῳ τριῶν καὶ δέκα μνῶν Is.6.33

    , cf. 8.8,35, 11.42,46, Aeschin. 2.162, D.19.155, 27.23,al., Arist.HA 525b15,17, Ath.19.6, Hipparch. 1.1.9, al., PSI10.1124.14 (ii A.D.).
    9 excluding, apart from, plus, ἓξ ἐμοὶ σ. ἑβδόμῳ six with (but not including) me the seventh, A. Th. 283;

    αἱ γὰρ καμπαὶ τέτταρες, ἢ δύο σ. τοῖς πτερυγίοις Arist.HA 490a32

    ;

    σ. τοῖς ἀρχαίοις τὸν οἶκον ἐκ τῶν προσόδων μείζω ποιῆσαι D. 27.61

    ;

    τὴν ἐφαπτίδα σ. τῇ σακκοπήρᾳ ἐν ᾗ ἐνῆν

     together with..,

    PEnteux.32.7

    , cf. 89.9 (iii B.C.);

    οἱ γραμματεῖς σ. τοῖς πρεσβυτέροις Ev.Luc.20.1

    , cf. Ep.Gal.5.24.
    B POSITION:— σύν sts. follows its case, Il.10.19, Od.9.332, 15.410. It freq. stands between Adj. and Subst., as Od.11.359, Il.9.194, etc.; more rarely between Subst. and Adj., Od.13.258, Pi.P. 8.7.
    2 freq. in tmesis in Hom., as Il.23.687, Od.14.296, etc.
    3 in late Gr. σὺν καὶ c. dat.,

    στεφανηφορήσας σ. καὶ Αὐρ. Ἰάσονι IG12(7).259

     (Amorgos, iii A.D.), cf. Supp.Epigr.4.535 (Ephesus, ii/iii A.D.), Rev.Phil.50.11 (Sardis, i/iii A.D.), CPR26.16 (ii A.D.); cf. infr. c. 2.
    C σύν AS ADV., together, at once,

    κενεὰς σ. Χεῖρας ἔχοντες Od.10.42

    ; mostly folld. by δέ or τε

    , σ. δὲ πτερὰ πυκνὰ λίασθεν Il.23.879

    ;

    σ. τε δύ' ἐρχομένω 10.224

     (cf. σύνδυο)

    ; ξ. τε διπλοῖ βασιλῆς S.Aj. 960

     (lyr.). It is sts. hard to distinguish this from tmesis, e.g. in Il.23.879; so ξὺν κακῶς ποιεῖν is = Ξυγκακοποιεῖν in Th.3.13. In Old Testament Gr. it is sts. used to translate the Hebr. 'ēth (particle prefixed to the definite accus.) through confusion with the Prep. 'ēth 'with',

    ἐμίσησα σὺν τὴν ζωήν LXXEc.2.17

    ; οὐκ ἐμνήσθη σ. τοῦ ἀνδρός ib.9.15;

    ἔκτισεν ὁ θεὸς σὺν τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ σὺν τὴν γῆν Aq.Ge.1.1

    , etc.
    2 besides, also,

    σ. δὲ πλουτίζειν ἐμέ A.Ag. 586

    ;

    σ. δ' αὔτως ἐγώ S.Ant. 85

    , etc.;

    σ. δ' ἐγὼ παρών Id.Aj. 1288

    , cf. El. 299;

    Δίρκα τε.. σ. τ' Ἀσωπιάδες κόραι E.HF 785

     (lyr.); in later Poetry

    σ. καί A.R.1.74

    , Herod.4.3, Nic.Th.8, D.P.843 (also in late Prose, Ath.2.49a; cf. supr. B. 3).
    I with, along with, together, at the same time, hence of any kind of union, connexion, or participation in a thing, and metaph. of agreement or unity. In Compos. with a trans. Verb σύν may refer to the Object as well as the Subject, as συγκατακτείνειν may mean kill one person as well as another, or, join with another in killing.
    2 of the completion of an action, altogether, completely, as in

    συνάγνυμι, συνασκέω 2

    , συνθρύπτω, συγκόπτω, συμπατέω, συμπληρόω, συντελέω, συντέμνω; sts., therefore, it seems only to strengthen the force of the simple word.
    3 joined with numerals, σύνδυο two together, which sense often becomes distributive, by twos, two and two; so σύντρεις, σύμπεντε, etc., like Lat. bini, terni, etc.
    II σύν in Compos., before β μ π φ ψ, becomes συμ-; before γ κ ξ Χ, συγ-; before λ συλ-; before ς usu. συς-; but becomes συ- before ς followed by a conson. (e.g. συστῆναι), before ζ, and perh. sts. before ξ. In a poet. passage, ap.Pl.Phdr. 237a, we have ξύμ alone in tmesi, ξύμ μοι λάβεσθε for συλλάβεσθέ μοι; cf.

    ὅτε ξὺμ πρῶτ' ἐφύοντο Emp.95

    : in Inscrr. and Papyri these assimilations are freq. not found.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > σύν

  • 70 μᾶλλον

    μᾶλλον (comp. of the adv. μάλα; Hom.+) ‘more, rather’
    ① to a greater or higher degree, more Phil 1:12. πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἔκραζεν he cried out even more loudly Mk 10:48; Lk 18:39. ἔτι μᾶλλον καὶ μᾶλλον more and more (cp. Diog. L. 9, 10, 2) Phil 1:9; Hs 9, 1, 8. ἐγὼ μᾶλλον I can do so even more Phil 3:4. The thing compared is introduced by ἤ (Apollon. Paradox. 9; Appian, Iber. 90 §392; Lucian, Adv. Ind. 2) Mt 18:13 or stands in the gen. of comparison (X., Mem. 4, 3, 8, Cyr. 3, 3, 45) πάντων ὑμῶν μ. γλώσσαις λαλῶ I (can) speak in tongues more than you all 1 Cor 14:18 (Just., A I, 12, 1 πάντων μᾶλλον ἀνθρώπων).—Abs. μ. can mean to a greater degree (than before), even more, now more than ever Lk 5:15; J 5:18; 19:8; Ac 5:14; 22:2; 2 Cor 7:7. Somet. it is also added to verbs: Σαῦλος μ. ἐνεδυναμοῦτο Ac 9:22.—In combination w. an adj. it takes the place of the comparative (Hom. et al.; Just., D. 107, 2 γενεὰν … μοιχαλίδα μ.; Synes., Ep. 123 p. 259d μ. ἄξιος) μακάριόν ἐστιν μᾶλλον Ac 20:35 (s. 3c below). καλόν ἐστιν αὐτῷ μᾶλλον Mk 9:42; cp. 1 Cor 9:15. πολλῷ μ. ἀναγκαῖά ἐστιν they are even more necessary 1 Cor 12:22. πολλὰ τ. τέκνα τῆς ἐρήμου μᾶλλον ἢ τῆς ἐχούσης τ. ἄνδρα the children of the desolate woman are numerous to a higher degree than (the children) of the woman who has a husband = the children are more numerous Gal 4:27 (Is 54:1).—Pleonastically w. words and expressions that already contain the idea ‘more’ (Kühner-G. I 26; OSchwab, Histor. Syntax der griech. Komparation III 1895, 59ff; B-D-F §246; Rob. 278) μ. διαφέρειν τινός Mt 6:26; Lk 12:24. περισσεύειν μᾶλλον 1 Th 4:1, 10; w. a comp. (Trag.; Hdt. 1, 32; X., Cyr. 2, 2, 12; Dio Chrys. 23 [40], 17; 32 [49], 14; Lucian, Gall. 13; Ps.-Lucian, Charid. 6; Just., A I, 19, 1 and D. 121, 2; Synes., Ep. 79 p. 227c; 103 p. 241d) πολλῷ μᾶλλον κρεῖσσον Phil 1:23. μᾶλλον περισσότερον ἐκήρυσσον Mk 7:36. περισσοτέρως μᾶλλον ἐχάρημεν we rejoiced still more 2 Cor 7:13. μ. ἐνδοξότεροι Hs 9, 28, 4. ὅσῳ δοκεῖ μ. μείζων εἶναι the more he seems to be great 1 Cl 48:6b.
    ② for a better reason, rather, all the more
    ⓐ rather, sooner (ApcMos 31 ἀνάστα μ., εὖξαι τῷ θεῷ) μ. χρῆσαι (X., Mem. 1, 2, 24) rather take advantage of it (i.e. either freedom or slavery) 1 Cor 7:21 (lit. on χράομαι 1a). The slaves who have Christian masters μᾶλλον δουλευέτωσαν should render them all the better service (so REB, NRSV) 1 Ti 6:2. νῦν πολλῷ μ. ἐν τ. ἀπουσίᾳ μου much more in my absence Phil 2:12. οὐ πολὺ μ. ὑποταγησόμεθα τ. πατρί; should we not much rather submit to the Father? Hb 12:9. τοσούτῳ μ. ὅσῳ all the more, since 10:25.
    ⓑ more (surely), more (certainly) πόσῳ μ. σοί how much more surely to you Phlm 16. πόσῳ μ. ὑμᾶς … ἐξεγείρει how much more will he raise you up (vivid use of the pres.) AcPlCor 2:31. πολλῷ μ. Ro 5:9 (s. HMüller, Der rabb. Qal-Wachomer Schluss. in paul. Theol., ZNW 58, ’67, 73–92). Very oft. a conditional clause (εἰ) precedes it (Epicurus in Diog. L. 10, 91 εἰ γὰρ …, πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἄν=if …, how much more surely) εἰ τὸν χόρτον ὁ θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέννυσιν, οὐ πολλῷ μ. ὑμᾶς; if God so clothes the grass, (will God) not much more surely (clothe) you? Mt 6:30. Likew. εἰ … πολλῷ μ. Ro 5:10, 15, 17; 2 Cor 3:9, 11; εἰ … πόσῳ μ. if … how much more surely Mt 7:11; 10:25; Lk 11:13; 12:28; Ro 11:12, 24; Hb 9:14. εἰ … πῶς οὐχὶ μ.; if … why should not more surely? 2 Cor 3:8. εἰ … πολὺ μ. ἡμεῖς if … then much more surely we Hb 12:25. εἰ ἄλλοι … οὐ μᾶλλον ἡμεῖς; if others (have a claim), do we not more surely (have one)? 1 Cor 9:12 (μ. can also mean above all, especially, e.g. Himerius, Or. 40 [Or. 6], 2).—CMaurer, Der Schluss ‘a minore ad majus’ als Element paul. Theol., TLZ 85, ’60, 149–52.
    ③ marker of an alternative to someth., rather in the sense instead (of someth.)
    ⓐ following a negative that
    α. is expressed: μὴ εἰσέλθητε. πορεύεσθε δὲ μ. do not enter (into); go instead Mt 10:6. μὴ φοβεῖσθε … φοβεῖσθε δὲ μ. vs. 28; ἵνα μὴ τὸ χωλὸν ἐκτραπῇ, ἰαθῇ δὲ μ. Hb 12:13. μὴ …, μᾶλλον δέ Eph 4:28; 5:11. μὴ or οὐ …, ἀλλὰ μ. (TestBenj 8:3; JosAs 26:2 A [p. 80, 2 Bat.]; ParJer 2:5; Just., A I, 27, 5; Syntipas p. 17, 3; 43, 17) Mt 27:24; Mk 5:26; Ro 14:13; Eph 5:4; AcPt Ox 849, 20.
    β. is unexpressed, though easily supplied fr. the context: πορεύεσθε μ. (do not turn to us), rather go Mt 25:9. ἵνα μ. τὸν Βαραββᾶν that he should (release) Barabbas instead (of Jesus) Mk 15:11. ἥδιστα μᾶλλον καυχήσομαι (I will not pray for release), rather I will gladly boast 2 Cor 12:9. μᾶλλον παρακαλῶ (I do not order), rather I request Phlm 9; τοὐναντίον μ. on the other hand rather 2 Cor 2:7. μᾶλλον αἰσχυνθῶμεν we should be ashamed of ourselves (rather than mistrust Mary of Magdala) GMary Ox 463, 25.
    ⓑ οὐχὶ μᾶλλον not rather follows a positive statement: ὑμεῖς πεφυσιωμένοι ἐστέ, καὶ οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἐπενθήσατε; you are puffed up; should you not rather be sad? 1 Cor 5:2. διὰ τί οὐχὶ μ. ἀδικεῖσθε; why do you not rather suffer wrong (instead of doing wrong to others)? 6:7a; cp. 7b.
    ⓒ μᾶλλον ἤ(περ) usually (exceptions: Ac 20:35 [Unknown Sayings, 77–81: this is not an exception, and renders ‘giving is blessed, not receiving’]; 1 Cor 9:15 [but see s.v. ἦ]; Gal 4:27) excludes fr. consideration the content of the phrase introduced by ἤ (Tat. 13, 3 θεομάχοι μ. ἤπερ θεοσεβεῖς; Appian, Iber. 26 §101 θαρρεῖν θεῷ μᾶλλον ἢ πλήθει στρατοῦ=put his trust in God, not in …) ἠγάπησαν οἱ ἄνθρωποι μ. τὸ σκότος ἢ τὸ φῶς people loved not light, but darkness J 3:19; cp. 12:43. ὑμῶν ἀκούειν μ. ἢ τοῦ θεοῦ, not obey God, but you instead Ac 4:19; cp. 5:29.—1 Ti 1:4; 2 Ti 3:4. τῷ ναυκλήρῳ μ. ἐπείθετο ἢ τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λεγομένοις he did not pay attention to what Paul said, but to the captain of the ship Ac 27:11. Likew. μᾶλλον ἑλόμενος ἤ he chose the one rather than the other Hb 11:25.
    ⓓ μᾶλλον δέ but rather, or rather, or simply rather, introduces an expr. or thought that supplements and thereby corrects what has preceded (Aristoph., Plut. 634; X., Cyr. 5, 4, 49; Demosth. 18, 65; Philo, Aet. M. 23; Just., D. 27, 4; 29, 2; Ath. 17, 3 μ. δέ; cp. Ar.; Just., A I, 17, 4 and D. 79, 1 μ. δὲ καί) Χρ. Ἰ. ὁ ἀποθανών, μᾶλλον δὲ ἐγερθείς Chr. J. who died, yes rather was raised Ro 8:34. γνόντες θεόν, μᾶλλον δὲ γνωσθέντες ὑπὸ θεοῦ since you have known God, or rather have been known by God Gal 4:9; cp. 1 Cor 14:1, 5.—Rydbeck 80ff. DELG s.v. μάλα. M-M. EDNT.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > μᾶλλον

  • 71 πρόσωπον

    πρόσωπον, ου, τό (Hom.+; loanw. in rabb.).
    ⓐ lit. face, countenance Mt 6:16f; 17:2; Mk 14:65; Lk 9:29 (s. εἶδος 1); Ac 6:15ab (Chariton 2, 2, 2 θαυμάζουσαι τὸ πρόσωπον ὡς θεῖον; Damasc., Vi. Isid. 80 Πρόκλος ἐθαύμαζε τὸ Ἰσιδώρου πρόσωπον, ὡς ἔνθεον ἦν; Marinus, Vi. Procli 23); 2 Cor 3:7 twice, 13 (JMorgenstern, Moses with the Shining Face: HUCA 2, 1925, 1–28); cp. vs. 18; 4:6; but in the last two passages there is a transition from the face of Moses to a symbolic use of πρ. (s. 1bβג below); Rv 4:7; 9:7ab; 10:1; IEph 15:3 (cp. 1bβו); MPol 12:1; Hv 3, 10, 1; B 5:14; GJs 17:2; 18:2 (codd.). ἐμβριθεῖ τῷ πρ. MPol 9:2 (s. ἐμβριθής). ποίῳ προσώπῳ GJs 13:1b. πρόσωπον τῆς γενέσεως αὐτοῦ the face he was born with Js 1:23 (γένεσις 2a). ἐμπτύειν εἰς τὸ πρ. τινος spit in someone’s face (s. ἐμπτύω) Mt 26:67. εἰς πρ. δέρειν τινά strike someone in the face 2 Cor 11:20. τύπτειν τὸ πρ. GJs 13:1a. συνέπεσεν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ his face fell or became distorted 1 Cl 4:3; cp. vs. 4 (Gen 4:6 and 5; JosAs 13:8). πίπτειν ἐπὶ (τὸ; the art. is usu. lacking; B-D-F §255, 4; 259, 1; cp. Rob. 792) πρ. αὐτοῦ fall on one’s face as a sign of devotion (=נָפַל עַל פָּנָיו; cp. Gen 17:3; Ruth 2:10; TestAbr A 9 p. 86, 16 [Stone p. 20]; JosAs 14:4 al.; ApcSed 14:2) Mt 17:6; 26:39; Rv 7:11; 11:16. Without αὐτοῦ (Gen 17:17; Num 14:5; Jos., Ant. 10, 11) Lk 5:12; 17:16; 1 Cor 14:25.
    ⓑ personal presence or relational circumstance, fig.
    α. in all kinds of imagery which, in large part, represent OT usage, and in which the face is oft. to be taken as the seat of the faculty of seeing. Βλέπειν πρόσωπον πρὸς πρόσωπον to see face to face 1 Cor 13:12 (cp. Gen 32:31 [Jos., Ant. 1, 334 θεοῦ πρόσωπον]; Judg 6:22. See HRiesenfeld, ConNeot 5, ’41, 19; 21f [abstracts of four articles]). κλίνειν τὸ πρ. εἰς τὴν γῆν Lk 24:5 (κλίνω 1). πρ. κυρίου ἐπὶ ποιοῦντας κακά 1 Pt 3:12; 1 Cl 22:6 (both Ps 33:17). ἐπίφανον τὸ πρ. σου ἐφʼ ἡμᾶς (ἐπιφαίνω 1) 60:3 (s. Num 6:25). ἐμφανισθῆναι τῷ προσώπῳ τοῦ θεοῦ (ἐμφανίζω 1) Hb 9:24. βλέπειν τὸ πρ. τινος, i.e. of God (βλέπω 1a, ὁράω A1c and s. JBoehmer, Gottes Angesicht: BFCT 12, 1908, 321–47; EGulin, D. Antlitz Jahwes im AT: Annal. Acad. Scient. Fenn. 17, 3, 1923; FNötscher, ‘Das Anges. Gottes schauen’ nach bibl. u. babylon. Auffassung 1924) Mt 18:10; cp. Rv 22:4. ὁρᾶν, ἰδεῖν or θεωρεῖν τὸ πρ. τινος see someone’s face, i.e. see someone (present) in person (UPZ 70, 5 [152/151 B.C.] οὐκ ἄν με ἶδες τὸ πρόσωπον. See Gen 32:21; 43:3, 5; 46:30 al.) Ac 20:25, 38; 1 Th 2:17b; 3:10; IRo 1:1; s. IPol 1:1. τὸ πρόσωπόν μου ἐν σαρκί Col 2:1. τῷ προσώπῳ ἀγνοούμενος unknown by face, i.e. personally Gal 1:22 (ἀγνοέω 1b). ἀπορφανισθέντες ἀφʼ ὑμῶν προσώπῳ οὐ καρδίᾳ (dat. of specification) orphaned by separation from you in person, not in heart (or outwardly, not inwardly) 1 Th 2:17a. ἐκζητεῖν τὰ πρόσωπα τῶν ἁγίων (ἐκζητέω 1) B 19:10; D 4:2. ἀποστρέφειν τὸ πρ. ἀπό τινος (ἀποστρέφω 1) 1 Cl 18:9 (Ps 50:11); 16:3 (Is 53:3). στερεῖν τοῦ προσώπου τινός B 13:4 (Gen 48:11).—τὸ πρόσωπον στηρίζειν (s. στηρίζω 2 and cp. SAntoniades, Neotestamentica: Neophilologus 14, 1929, 129–35) Lk 9:51. τὸ πρ. αὐτοῦ ἦν πορευόμενον εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ his face was set toward Jerusalem vs. 53 (cp. 2 Km 17:11).—θαυμάζειν πρόσωπον flatter Jd 16 (PsSol 2:18; s. also θαυμάζω 1bα). λαμβάνειν πρόσωπον (=נָשָׂא פָנִים; cp. Sir 4:22; 35:13; 1 Esdr 4:39; s. Thackeray p. 43f; B-D-F p. 3, note 5; Rob. 94) show partiality or favoritism Lk 20:21; B 19:4; D 4:3. λαμβ. πρόσωπόν τινος (cp. Mal 1:8) Gal 2:6. S. PKatz, Kratylos 5, ’60, 161.
    β. governed by prepositions, in usages where πρ. in many cases requires a dynamic equivalent
    א. ἀπὸ προσώπου τινός from the presence of someone (JosAs 28:10; Just., A I, 36, 1; s. Vi. Aesopi W 104 v.l. p. 188 last line P. ἐπιστολὴ ὡς ἐκ προσώπου τοῦ Αἰσώπου) Ac 3:20; (away) from someone or someth. (Ctesias: 688 Fgm. 9 Jac. φυγεῖν ἀπὸ προσώπου Κύρου; LXX; PsSol 4:8 al.; Herodas 8, 59 ἔρρʼ ἐκ προσώπου=get out of my sight; TestAbr A 2 p. 78, 11 [Stone p. 4] ἐκ προσώπου: here because of the compound ἐξέρχομαι) 5:41; 7:45; 2 Th 1:9; Rv 6:16 (Is 2:10, 19, 21); 12:14; 20:11 (cp. Ex 14:25; Josh 10:11; Sir 21:2; 1 Macc 5:34 and oft.) 1 Cl 4:8 (s. ἀποδιδράσκω), 10 (s. the passages cited for Rv 20:11 above); 18:11 (Ps 50:13; ἀπο[ρ]ρίπτω 2); 28:3 (Ps 138:7).
    ב. εἰς πρόσωπον: (Aesop, Fab. 302 P.= εἰς Ζηνὸς πρόσωπον ἔρχεσθαι=before the face of Zeus) εἰς πρόσωπον τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν before (lit. ‘in the face of’) the congregations 2 Cor 8:24. τὰ φαινόμενά σου εἰς πρόσωπον what meets your eye, i.e. the visible world IPol 2:2. βλέπειν εἰς πρόσωπόν τινος Mt 22:16; Mk 12:14 (s. βλέπω 4). To one’s face i.e. when present Hv 3, 6, 3 cj. (cp. POxy 903, 2; BGU 909, 12).
    ג. ἐν προσώπῳ (Maximus Tyr. 38, 1a) ἐν προσώπῳ Χριστοῦ before the face of Christ that looks down with approval 2 Cor 2:10 (cp. Pr 8:30; Sir 35:4), or as the representative of Christ (REB); difft. 4:6 on the face of Christ (s. 1a above).
    ד. κατὰ πρόσωπον face to face, (present) in person (Polyb. 24, 15, 2; Diod S 19, 46, 2; Plut., Caesar 716 [17, 8]; IMagnMai 93b, 11; IPriene 41, 6; OGI 441, 66 [81 B.C.]; PLond II, 479, 6 p. 256 [III A.D.?]; POxy 1071, 1) B 15:1. (Opp. ἀπών) 2 Cor 10:1. Παῦλος, ὸ̔ς γενόμενος ἐν ὑμῖν κατὰ πρόσωπον Pol 3:2. πρὶν ἢ ὁ κατηγορούμενος κατὰ πρόσωπον ἔχοι τοὺς κατηγόρους before the accused meets his accusers face to face Ac 25:16, κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτῷ ἀντέστην I opposed him to his face Gal 2:11 (cp. Diod S 40, 5a of an accusation κατὰ πρόσωπον; 2 Macc 7:6; Jos., Ant. 5, 46; 13, 278).—κατὰ πρόσωπον with partiality, in favoritism B 19:7; D 4:10.—τὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον what is before your eyes 2 Cor 10:7.—Used w. the gen. like a prep. (PPetr III, 1 II, 8 κατὰ πρόσωπον τοῦ ἱεροῦ; LXX; Jos., Ant. 3, 144; 9, 8) κατὰ πρ. τινος before or in the presence of someone (Jos., Ant. 11, 235) Lk 2:31; Ac 3:13; 16:9 D; 1 Cl 35:10 (Ps. 49:21).
    ה. μετὰ προσώπου: πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου Ac 2:28 (Ps 15:11); μετά A 2γ ג.
    ו. πρὸ προσώπου τινός (LXX; TestAbr A 12 p. 91, 4 [Stone p. 30] πρὸ προσώπου τῆς τραπέζης; GrBar 1:4; s. Johannessohn, Präp. 184–86) before someone Mt 11:10; Mk 1:2; Lk 7:27 (on all three cp. Mal 3:1).—Lk 1:76 v.l. (s. Ex 32:34); 9:52 (s. Ex 23:20); 10:1; 1 Cl 34:3 (s. Is 62:11). IEph 15:3 (cp. 1a).—πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ Ac 13:24 (εἴσοδος 2).
    ② entire bodily presence, person (Polyb. 5, 107, 3; 8, 13, 5; 12, 27, 10; 27, 7, 4; Diod S 37, 12, 1; Plut., Mor. 509b; Epict. 1, 2, 7; Vett. Val. s. index; Just., A I, 36, 2; POxy 1672, 4 [37–41 A.D.] ξένοις προσώποις=to strangers; 237 VII, 34; PRyl 28, 88. Cp. Phryn. p. 379 Lob., also Lob.’s comment p. 380; KPraechter, Philol 63, 1904, 155f) ὀλίγα πρόσωπα a few persons 1 Cl 1:1; ἓν ἢ δύο πρ. 47:6. τὰ προγεγραμμένα πρ. the persons mentioned above IMg 6:1. Here is surely also the place for ἐκ πολλῶν προσώπων by many (persons) 2 Cor 1:11 (from Luther to NRSV et al.; ‘face’ is preferred by Heinrici, Plummer et al.—With this expr. cp. Diod S 15, 38, 4 ἐκ τρίτου προσώπου=[claims were raised] by a third ‘party’, i.e. Thebes, against Sparta and Athens).
    ③ the outer surface of someth., face= surface πρόσωπον τῆς γῆς (Gen 2:6; 7:23; 11:4, 8 al.) Lk 21:35; Ac 17:26; B 11:7 (Ps 1:4); and 6:9 prob. belongs here also.
    ④ that which is present in a certain form or character to a viewer, external things, appearance opp. καρδία (1 Km 16:7) 2 Cor 5:12. πρόσωπον εἰρήνης (opp. πονηρίαι … ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις) Hv 3, 6, 3. ἡ εὐπρέπεια τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ (i.e. of grass and flowers) Js 1:11. Of the appearance of the sky Mt 16:3; cp. Lk 12:56 (s. Ps 103:30).—SSchlossmann, Persona u. Πρόσωπον im röm. Recht u. christl. Dogma 1906; RHirzel, Die Person; Begriff u. Name derselben im Altertum: SBBayAk 1914, Heft 10; HRheinfelder, Das Wort ‘Persona’; Gesch. seiner Bed. 1928; FAltheim, Persona: ARW 27, 1929, 35–52; RAC I 437–40; BHHW I 93f. B. 216.—DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πρόσωπον

  • 72 ἄν

    1
    I. ἄν (after relatives ἐάν [q.v.] is oft. used for ἄν, but the mss. vary greatly, s. B-D-F §107; 377; Mlt. 42ff, 165ff; Mayser 152f; Crönert 130f; Thackeray 67; Dssm., NB 30ff [BS 202ff]). A particle peculiar to Gk. (Hom.+) denoting aspect of contingency, incapable of translation by a single English word; it denotes that the action of the verb is dependent on some circumstance or condition; the effect of ἄν upon the meaning of its clause depends on the mood and tense/aspect of the verb w. which it is used. The NT use of ἄν corresponds in the main to older Gk., although the rich variety of its employment is limited, as is generally the case in later Greek. In certain constructions (s. aβ) an aspect of certainty is indicated, suggesting the gloss would. In most other instances aspects of varying possibility or conditionality find expression in ways that can be rendered ever, but with other glosses required when ἄν is used in conjunction with other particles.
    ⓐ ἄν w. aor. or impf. indic.
    α. denoting repeated action in past time, but only under certain given conditions, esp. after relatives (B-D-F §367; Rob. index): aor. (Gen 30:42; Num 9:17; 1 Km 14:47; Ezk 10:11) ὅσοι ἂν ἥψαντο αὐτοῦ, ἐσῴζοντο whoever touched him was cured Mk 6:56. Impf. (Ezk 1:20; 1 Macc 13:20; Tob 7:11) ὅπου ἂν εἰσεπορεύετο εἰς κώμας wherever he went (as he was accustomed to do—ADebrunner, D. hellenist. Nebensatziterativpräteritum mit ἄν: Glotta 11, 1920, 1–28) into villages Mk 6:56. καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν as anyone was in need Ac 2:45; 4:35. Similarly ὡς ἂν ἤγεσθε (v.l. ἀνήγεσθε) 1 Cor 12:2. Cp. also ὅταν 1bγ and δ.
    β. in the apodosis of a contrary to fact (unreal) condition w. εἰ (B-D-F §360; but ἄν is not always used [s. the vv.ll. J 18:36]: §360, 1; Mlt. 199ff; PMelcher, De sermone Epicteteo 1905, 75); it is found
    א. w. impf. (4 Macc 17:7; Bar 3:13; ParJer 5:20; GrBar 6:6; ApcMos 39) οὗτος εἰ ἦν προφήτης, ἐγίνωσκεν ἄν if he were a prophet, he would (now) know (but he does not) Lk 7:39. εἰ ἔχετε πίστιν …, ἐλέγετε ἄν if you had faith …, you would say 17:6. εἰ ἐπιστεύετε Μωϋσεῖ, ἐπιστεύετε ἂν ἐμοί J 5:46. εἰ ἐμὲ ᾔδειτε, καὶ τὸν πατέρα μου ἄν ᾔδειτε 8:19; cp. vs. 42; 9:41; 15:19. εἰ ἔτι ἀνθρώποις ἤρεσκον, Χριστοῦ δοῦλος οὐκ ἂν ἤμην Gal 1:10; cp. 3:21. εἰ ἑαυτοὺς διεκρίνομεν, οὐκ ἂν ἐκρινόμεθα 1 Cor 11:31. εἰ ἦν ἐπὶ γῆς, οὐδʼ ἂν ἦν ἱερεύς if he were on earth, he would not even be a priest Hb 8:4; cp. 4:8; 8:7; 11:15.
    ב. w. aor., placing the assumption in the past (Gen 30:27; Wsd 11:25; Jdth 11:2; 4 Macc 2:20; TestJob 7:9 al.; ParJer 5:5; GrBar 8:7; PGiss 47, 17) εἰ ἐγένοντο αἱ δυνάμεις, πάλαι ἂν … μετενόησαν if the miracles had been performed, they would long ago have repented Mt 11:21. εἰ ἔγνωσαν, οὐκ ἂν ἐσταύρωσαν 1 Cor 2:8; cp. Ro 9:29 (Is 1:9). εἰ ἐγνώκειτε, οὐκ ἂν κατεδικάσατε if you had recognized, you would not have condemned Mt 12:7. εἰ ἠγαπᾶτέ με, ἐχάρητε ἄν if you loved me, you would have rejoiced J 14:28; cp. 11:21. The plpf. for aor. indic. (PGiss 79 II, 6 εἰ δυνατόν μοι ἦν, οὐκ ἂν ὠκνήκειν; BGU 1141, 27f) εἰ ἦσαν, μεμενήκεισαν ἄν 1J 2:19; cp. J 11:21 v.l.—In κἀγὼ ἐλθὼν σὺν τόκῳ ἂν αὐτὸ ἔπραξα Lk 19:23, ἐλθών functions as an unreal-temporal protasis (B-D-F §360, 2); cp. καὶ ἐλθὼν ἐγὼ ἐκομισάμην ἂν τὸ ἐμόν Mt 25:27. Sim. ἐπεὶ οὐκ ἂν ἐπαύσαντο προσφερόμεναι; where ἐπεί functions as protasis, otherwise (i.e. if the sacrifices had really brought about a lasting atonement) would they not have ceased to offer sacrifices? Hb 10:2.
    ⓑ ἄν w. subjunc. after relatives, the rel. clause forming virtually the protasis of a conditional sentence (B-D-F §380, 1) of the future more vivid or present general type.
    α. w. fut. or impf. in apodosis, to show that the condition and its results are thought of as in the future, of single and repeated action (IG XIV, 865 [VI B.C.] ὸ̔ς δʼ ἄν με κλέψῃ, τυφλὸς ἔσται; TestAbr B 4 p. 109, 10 [Stone p. 66]). ὸ̔ς δʼ ἂν ποιήσῃ καὶ διδάξῃ, οὗτος μέγας κληθήσεται but whoever does and teaches=if a person does and teaches it Mt 5:19. ὸ̔ς ἂν ἐσθίῃ …, ἔνοχος ἔσται 1 Cor 11:27. οὓς ἐὰν (v.l. ἂν) δοκιμάσητε, τούτους πέμψω 16:3—Mt 10:11; 1 Cor 16:2.
    β. w. pres. in apodosis, to show that the condition and its results involve repeated action, regardless of the time element: ἃ ἂν ἐκεῖνος ποιῇ, ταῦτα καὶ ὁ υἱὸς ὁμοίως ποιεῖ whatever he does, the Son does likewise J 5:19. ὅπου ἐὰν (v.l. ἂν) αὐτὸν καταλάβῃ, ῥήσσει αὐτόν wherever it seizes him Mk 9:18. ὑμῖν ἐστὶν ἡ ἐπαγγελία …, ὅσους ἂν προσκαλέσηται κύριος Ac 2:39. ὸ̔ς ἐὰν (v.l. ἂν) βουληθῇ φίλος εἶναι τοῦ κόσμου, ἐχθρὸς τοῦ θεοῦ καθίσταται whoever wishes to be a friend of the world Js 4:4. Cp. ὅπου ἄν 3:4 v.l.—Where ὅς or ὅστις appears w. subj. without ἄν (but cp. IG XII/1, 671 ὸ̔ς ἀνασπαράξῃ τ. τάφον; CPR I, 24, 33; 25, 19; AcThom 93 [Aa II/2, 206], 19; Is 7:2; 31:4), the reading that gives the fut. ind. is prob. the right one: ὅστις τηρήσῃ (v.l.-σει) Js 2:10. ὅσοι (without ἄν PPetr I, 13, 3;5; CPR I, 237, 3; IPergamon 249, 26 ὅσοι … ἐγλίπωσι τὴν πόλιν; Vett. Val. 125, 16): ὅσοι μετανοήσωσιν καὶ καθαρίσωσιν Hs 8, 11, 3 (s. W. and Joly app. for the textual tradition). See Reinhold 108; B-D-F §380, 4.
    ⓒ In temporal clauses ἄν is found w. the subjunct. when an event is to be described which can and will occur, but whose occurrence cannot yet be assumed w. certainty. So
    α. ὅταν (=ὅτε ἄν; s. ὅταν) w. pres. subjunct. to indicate regularly recurring action (Wsd 12:18): ὅταν ἄρτον ἐσθίωσιν whenever they eat bread Mt 15:2. ὅταν λαλῇ τὸ ψεῦδος whenever he tells a lie J 8:44. ὅταν λέγῃ τις whenever anyone says 1 Cor 3:4.—W. aor. subjunct. to express action in the future which is thought of as already completed (Sir Prol. ln. 22; Tob 8:21) ὅταν ποιήσητε πάντα when you have done Lk 17:10. ὅταν ἔλθῃ ὁ κύριος when the owner has come Mt 21:40; ὅταν ἔλθῃ ἐν τῇ δόξῃ Mk 8:38; cp. J 4:25; 16:13; Ac 23:35. ὅταν πάλιν εἰσαγάγῃ τὸν πρωτότοκον Hb 1:6.
    β. ἡνίκα ἄν every time that (Ex 1:10; 33:22; 34:24 al.; POxy 104, 26 [96 A.D.]; PTebt 317, 18 [174/75] ἡνίκα ἐὰν εἰς τὸν νόμον παραγένηται). ἡνίκα ἂν (also ἐάν mss.) ἀναγινώσκηται Μωϋσῆς every time that Moses is read aloud 2 Cor 3:15; cp. vs. 16.
    γ. ὁσάκις ἐάν as often as: ὁσάκις ἐὰν (also ἄν mss.) πίνητε 1 Cor 11:25. ὁσάκις ἐὰν (also ἄν mss.) ἐσθίητε vs. 26.
    δ. ὡς ἄν as soon as (PHib 59, 2 [c. 245 B.C.] ὡς ἂν λάβῃς; 66, 4; PEleph 9, 3 [III B.C.]; PParis 46, 18 [143 B.C.]; BGU 1209, 13 [23 B.C.]; Josh 2:14; Jdth 11:15; 1 Macc 15:9): ὡς ἂν πορεύωμαι as soon as I travel Ro 15:24. ὡς ἂν ἔλθω as soon as I come 1 Cor 11:34. ὡς ἂν ἀφίδω τὰ περὶ ἐμέ as soon as I see how it will go with me Phil 2:23. ὡς ἐάν (PFay 111, 16 [95/96]) Hv 3, 8, 9; 3, 13, 2.—ἀφʼ οὗ ἄν after Lk 13:25.—In the case of temporal particles indicating a goal, viz. ἕως οὗ, ἄχρις (οὗ), μέχρις (οὗ), the mss. show considerable variation; the addition of ἄν is prob. correct only in rare cases (see B-D-F §383, 2). Only ἕως ἄν (PPetr II, 40a, 28 [III B.C.] ἕως ἂν ὑγιαίνοντας ὑμᾶς ἴδωμεν; Gen 24:14, 19; 49:10; Ex 23:30 al.) has certain attestation: μείνατε ἕως ἂν ἐξέλθητε stay until you go away Mt 10:11. ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ Lk 9:27.—Mt 2:13; 5:26. ἕως ἂν λάβῃ Js 5:7 v.l.—ἄχρις οὗ (+ ἄν v.l.) ἔλθῃ 1 Cor 11:26. ἄχρις οὗ (+ ἄν v.l.) θῇ 15:25; ἄχρις οὗ ἂν ἥξω Rv 2:25 (v.l. ἄχρι). ἄχρις ἂν ἔλθῃ (cp. BGU 830, 13 [I A.D.] ἄχρις ἄν σοι ἔλθω) Gal 3:19 v.l.—πρὶν ἄν: πρὶν ἢ ἂν (vv.ll. πρὶν ἄν, πρὶν ἢ, only πρὶν or ἕως ἂν) ἴδῃ τὸν Χριστόν Lk 2:26 (B-D-F §383, 3).
    ⓓ In purpose clauses the Attic (EHermann, Griech. Forschungen I, 1912, 267f; JKnuenz, De enuntiatis Graec. finalibus 1913, 13ff; 26ff) ὅπως ἄν, esp. freq. in earlier ins (Meisterhans3-Schw. 254), has become quite rare (LXX still rather often: Gen 18:19; 50:20; Ex 33:13; Jer 7:23 al.) ὅπως ἂν ἀποκαλυφθῶσιν διαλογισμοί Lk 2:35. ὅπως ἂν ἔλθωσιν καιροί Ac 3:20.—15:17 (Am 9:12 v.l.); Ro 3:4 (Ps 50:6); Mt 6:5 v.l.
    ⓔ The opt. w. ἄν in a main clause (potential opt.) has almost wholly disappeared; a rare ex. is εὐξαίμην (v.l. εὐξάμην) ἄν Ac 26:29 in Paul’s speech before Agrippa (literary usage; s. B-D-F §385, 1; also Rob. 938; Themist. 6 p. 80 D.—On the rarity of the potential opt. in pap, LXX, Apost. Fathers see CHarsing, De Optat. in Chartis Aeg. Usu, diss. Bonn 1910, 28; Reinhold 111). Cp.—also in the literary lang. of Lk—direct rhetor. questions (Gen 23:15; Job 19:23; Sir 25:3; 4 Macc 7:22; 14:10 v.l.; TestJob 13:5 τίς ἄν δώῃ 35:5) πῶς γὰρ ἂν δυναίμην; Ac 8:31. τί ἂν θέλοι οὗτος λέγειν; 17:18. Dg has also preserved the opt. as a mark of elegant style (2:3, 10; 3:3f; 4:5; 7:2f; 8:3). MPol 2:2 has τίς οὐκ ἂν θαυμάσειεν;—More freq. in an indirect question, after an impf. or histor. pres. (B-D-F §386, 1; Rob. 938f) τὸ τί ἂν θέλοι καλεῖσθαι αὐτό what he wanted the child’s name to be Lk 1:62. τίς ἂν εἴη περὶ οὗ λέγει J 13:24. τὸ τίς ἂν εἴη μείζων αὐτῶν which of them was the greatest Lk 9:46; cp. 18:36 v.l. τί ἂν ποιήσαιεν τῷ Ἰησοῦ what they should do to Jesus 6:11. τί ἂν γένοιτο τοῦτο Ac 5:24. τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὅραμα 10:17. (IMagnMai 215 [I A.D.] ἐπερωτᾷ … τί ἂν ποιήσας … ἀδεῶς διατελοίη; Esth 3:13c πυθομένου δέ μου … πῶς ἂν ἀχθείη τοῦτο.)
    ⓕ The use of ἄν w. inf. and ptc., freq. in earlier Gk., is not found in the NT at all (B-D-F §396); ἵνα μὴ δόξω ὡς ἂν (or ὡσὰν, q.v.) ἐκφοβεῖν ὑμᾶς 2 Cor 10:9 is surely to be expl. in such a way that ὡς ἂν=Lat. quasi: I would not want it to appear as if I were frightening you; s. B-D-F §453, 3; Mlt. 167.—On εἰ μήτι ἂν (sc. γένηται) ἐκ συμφώνου except perhaps by agreement 1 Cor 7:5 s. B-D-F §376; Mlt. 169.—M-M.
    2
    II. ἄν for ἐάν is rare in Hellen. Gk. (B-D-F §107; Mlt. 43 n. 2; cp. Hyperid. 4, 5; 5, 15; Teles p. 31, 6; Plut., Mor. 547a; Epict., index Schenkl; pap [Mayser 152]; ins, esp. of the Aegean Sea [Rdm.2 198, 3; s. also SIG index IV 204]; 1 Esdr 2:16; 4 Macc 16:11; Jos., Ant. 4, 70; 219; Test12Patr; Mel. Fgm. 8b 24), but appears J 13:20; 16:23; 20:23; as v.l. 5:19; 9:22; 12:32; 19:12; Ac 9:2; and IMg 10:1.—Mlt. 63, 1.—M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἄν

  • 73 ὀφθαλμός

    ὀφθαλμός, οῦ, ὁ (Hom.+)
    ① eye as organ of sense perception, eye Mt 5:29, 38 (Ex 21:24; s. DDaube, JTS 45, ’44, 177–89.—The principle ἐάν τίς τινος ὀφθαλμὸν ἐκκόψῃ, ἀντεκκόπτεσθαι τὸν ἐκείνου in early Gk. legislation in Diod S 12, 17, 4; Diog. L. 1, 57 [Solon]); 6:22; 7:3ff (s. δοκός); Mk 9:47; Lk 6:41f; 11:34; J 9:6; 1 Cor 12:16f; Rv 1:14; 2:18; 7:17; 19:12; 21:4; 1 Cl 10:4 (Gen 13:14) and oft.; GJs 19:2. More than two eyes in the same creature (Artem. 1, 26 p. 28, 13ff) Rv 4:6, 8 (after Ezk 1:18; 10:12); 5:6 (cp. Lucian, Dial. Deor. 3 and 20, 8: Argus w. many eyes, who sees w. his whole body, and never sleeps; Ath. 20, 1 [of Athena]).—εἶδον οἱ ὀφ. μου (cp. Sir 16:5) Lk 2:30; cp.4:20; 10:23; 1 Cor 2:9 (=1 Cl 34:8; 2 Cl 11:7; MPol 2:3. On possible Gnostic associations s. UWilcken, Weisheit u. Torheit, ’59, 77–80 and Hippolytus 5, 26, 16); Rv 1:7.—ἰδεῖν τοῖς ὀφ. Dg 2:1 (Philo, Sacr. Abel. 24). ὸ̔ ἑωράκαμεν τοῖς ὀφ. ἡμῶν 1J 1:1 (cp. Zech 9:8 A). βλέπειν ἐν τοῖς ὀφ. GJs 17:2. ὀφ. πονηρός an evil eye i.e. one that looks w. envy or jealousy upon other people (Sir 14:10; Maximus Tyr. 20:7b) Mt 6:23 (opp. ἁπλοῦς; s. this entry, the lit. s.v. λύχνος b and πονηρός 3a, and also PFiebig, Das Wort Jesu v. Auge: StKr 89, 1916, 499–507; CEdlund, Das Auge der Einfalt: ASNU 19, ’52; HCadbury, HTR 47, ’54, 69–74; JHElliott, The Evil Eye and the Sermon on the Mt: Biblical Interpretation 2, ’94, 51–84). Cp. 20:15. By metonymy for envy, malice Mk 7:22 (but the mng. stinginess, love for one’s own possessions is upheld for all the NT pass. w. ὀφ. πον. by CCadoux, ET 53, ’41/42, 354f, esp. for Mt 20:15, and w. ref. to Dt 15:9 al. Envy, etc. is preferred by CSmith, ibid. 181f; 54, ’42/43, 26 and JPercy, ibid. 26f).—ἐν ῥιπῄ ὀφθαλμοῦ in the twinkling of an eye 1 Cor 15:52. ἀγαπήσεις ὡς κόρην τοῦ ὀφ. σου you are to love as the apple of your eye 19:9 (s. κόρη).—Used w. verbs: αἴρω ἄνω (αἴρω 1b). ἀνοίγω (q.v. 5b). ἐξαιρέω (q.v. 1). ἐξορύσσω (q.v.). ἐπαίρω (q.v. 1). κρατέω (q.v. 5). ὑπολαμβάνειν τινὰ ἀπὸ τῶν ὀφ. τινός take someone up out of sight of someone Ac 1:9.—ἡ ἐπιθυμία τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν 1J 2:16 (Maximus Tyr. 19, 21m ἐπιθυμία goes through the ὀφθαλμοί). ὀφθαλμοὶ μεστοὶ μοιχαλίδος 2 Pt 2:14 (on the imagery cp. Sir 26:9; s. μεστός 2b).—It is characteristic of the OT (but s. also Hes., Op. 267 πάντα ἰδὼν Διὸς ὀφθαλμός; Polyb. 23, 10, 3 Δίκης ὀφ.; Aristaen, Ep. 1, 19 at the beginning, the pl. of the eyes of Tyche. ὄμματα is also found of a divinity: Alciphron 3, 8, 2; 4, 9, 4) to speak anthropomorphically of God’s eyes Hb 4:13; 1 Pt 3:12; 1 Cl 22:6 (the last two Ps 33:16). A transference is readily made to
    ② mental and spiritual understanding, eye, understanding, ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες οὐ βλέπετε Mk 8:18.—Mt 13:15b; J 12:40b; Ac 28:27b (all three Is 6:10); Mt 13:16. ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ θεὸς ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν the kind of eyes with which they do not see (s. B-D-F §393, 6; 400, 2; Rob. 1061; 1076) Ro 11:8 (cp. Dt 29:3). οἱ ὀφ. τῆς καρδίας the eyes of the heart (s. καρδία 1bβ and cp. Herm. Wr. 7, 1 ἀναβλέψαντες τοῖς τῆς καρδίας ὀφθαλμοῖς; 10, 4 ὁ τοῦ νοῦ ὀφθαλμός; Just., D. 134, 5 οἱ τῆς ψυχῆς ὀφθαλμοί.—Sir 17:8) Eph 1:18; 1 Cl 36:2; 59:3; MPol 2:3. Cp. also the entries καμμύω, σκοτίζω, τυφλόω.—W. a prep.: ἀπέναντι τῶν ὀφ. τινος s. ἀπέναντι 1bβ. ἐκρύβη ἀπὸ ὀφθαλμῶν σου it is hidden from the eyes of your mind Lk 19:42 (cp. Sir 17:15). ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς (LXX; s. Thackeray 43): ἔστιν θαυμαστὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν it is marvelous in our sight (=in our judgment) Mt 21:42; Mk 12:11 (both Ps 117:23), but ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν GJs 16:1 (as Lucian, Tox. 39) means ‘before our eyes’ (likew. Apollon. Rhod. 4, 1619 τέρας ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖσιν ἰδόντες=gaze with their eyes on the portent; Diod S 3, 18, 5 ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς=before their eyes). κατʼ ὀφθαλμούς τινος before someone’s eyes, in someone’s sight (2 Km 12:11; 4 Km 25:7; Jer 35:5; Ezk 20:14, 22, 41; 21:11; 22:16; 36:23): οἷς κατʼ ὀφθαλμοὺς Ἰ. Χριστὸς προεγράφη before whose eyes Jesus Christ was portrayed Gal 3:1. πρὸ ὀφθαλμῶν before (someone’s) eyes (Hyperid. 6, 17; SIG 495, 120 [c. 230 B.C.]; BGU 362 V, 8; LXX; EpArist 284): πρὸ ὀφθαλμῶν λαμβάνειν (Polyb.; Diod S 26, 16b [s. FKrebs, Die Präp. bei Polyb. 1882, 38]; 2 Macc 8:17; 3 Macc 4:4) place before one’s eyes 1 Cl 5:3. πρὸ ὀφθαλμῶν ἔχειν (JosAs 7:6; Lucian, Tyrannici. 7; OGI 210, 8; PGiss 67, 10; Just., D. 20, 1 al.) keep one’s eyes on someth. MPol 2:3. πρὸ ὀφθαλμῶν τινος εἶναι (Dt 11:18) be before someone’s eyes 1 Cl 2:1; 39:3 (Job 4:16).—B. 225. DELG s.v. ὄπωπα. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὀφθαλμός

  • 74 καλέω

    καλέω impf. ἐκάλουν; fut. καλέσω (LXX; JosAs 17:5; 20:6; Jos., Ant. 11, 266.—W-S. §13, 5; B-D-F §74, 1; Mlt-H. 242); 1 aor. ἐκάλεσα; pf. κέκληκα. Mid.: fut. 3 sg. καλέσεται (Just., D. 43, 5). Pass. 1 fut. κληθῆσομαι (W-S. §15); 2 fut. 3 sg. κεκλήσεται Lev 13:45; Hos 12:1; 1 aor. ἐκλήθην; pf. κέκλημαι (Hom.+).
    ① to identify by name or attribute, call, call by name, name
    ⓐ call (to someone) abs., with naming implied (opp. ὑπακούειν; cp. PHamb 29, 3 [89 A.D.] κληθέντων τινῶν καὶ μὴ ὑπακουσάντων; Just., D. 136, 2 οὔτε καλοῦντος αὐτοῦ ἀνέχεσθε οὔτε λαλοῦντος ἀκούετε) of God ἐκάλουν καὶ οὐχ ὑπηκούσατε 1 Cl 57:4 (Pr 1:24); w. obj. τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα καλεῖ κατʼ ὄνομα J 10:3 v.l.
    ⓑ call, address as, designate as w. double acc. (Just., D. 3, 5 θεὸν σὺ τί καλεῖς; Hippol., Ref. 6, 20, 1) αὐτὸν καλῶμεν κύριον 2 Cl 4:1; cp. Mt 22:43, 45; 23:9 (here the sense supplies the second acc.: you are to call no one your father); Lk 20:44; Ac 14:12; Ro 9:25; Hb 2:11; 1 Pt 1:17 P72; 3:6. A voc. can take the place of the second acc. τί με καλεῖτε κύριε, κύριε; Lk 6:46. Pass. καλεῖσθαι ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ῥαββί Mt 23:7. ὑμεῖς μὴ κληθῆτε ῥαββί you are not to have people call you ‘rabbi’ vs. 8; vs. 10. Cp. Lk 22:25; Js 2:23. ὁ οἶκός μου οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται Mt 21:13; Mk 11:17 (both Is 56:7). κληθήσονται υἱοὶ θεοῦ Ro 9:26 (Hos 2:1).
    ⓒ name, provide with a name w. double acc. (Iren. 1, 1, 1 [Harv. I 8, 3]) ἐκάλουν αὐτὸ … Ζαχαρίαν they were for naming him Z. Lk 1:59 (on ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τ. πατρός after his father[’s name] cp. 1 Esdr 5:38; Sir 36:11 and s. Hs 9, 17, 4).—Pass. be given a name, be named (Jos., Ant. 1, 34) κληθήσεται Ἰωάννης his name is to be John Lk 1:60; cp. vs. 62. σὺ κληθήσῃ Κηφᾶς J 1:42. Also of localities Mt 27:8; Ac 1:19; ApcPt Rainer (s. Ἀχερουσία).—Have as a name, be called (Lucian, Jud. Voc. 7 Λυσίμαχος ἐκαλεῖτο; Just., D. 1, 3 Τρύφων…καλοῦμαι; 63, 5 Χριστιανοὶ … καλούμεθα) ὸ̔ς καλεῖται τ. ὀνόματι τούτῳ who bears this name Lk 1:61. Also of localities (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 70 §289; 3, 91 §374; SIG 599, 5 τὸ φρούριον ὸ̔ καλεῖται Κάριον; Just., A I, 59, 6 τὸ καλούμενον Ἔρεβος) πόλις Δαυὶδ ἥτις καλεῖται Βηθλέεμ Lk 2:4. Cp. Ac 28:1; Rv 11:8.—Lk, Ac, Rv, GPt add to a pers. or thing the name or surname which he, she, or it bears, by means of the pres. pass. ptc. (cp. SIG 685, 39 νῆσον τὴν καλουμένην Λεύκην; 826e 22; 1063, 5; PPetr II, 45 II, 20; BGU 1000, 6; PCairGoodsp 9, 4; O. Wilck II, 1210, 4). The name: ἀδελφὴ καλουμένη Μαριάμ a sister named Mary Lk 10:39 (PCairMasp 23, 16 τ. ἀδελφὴν καλουμένην Πρόκλαν; TestJob 48:1 ἡ καλουμένη Ἡμέρα). Cp. 19:2; Ac 7:58; Rv 19:11, also 12:9. πόλις καλουμένη Ν. Lk 7:11; cp. 9:10; 19:29; 21:37; 23:33; Ac 1:12; 3:11; 8:10; 9:11; 10:1; 27:8, 14, 16; Rv 1:9; 16:16; GPt 6:24. The surname (2 Macc 10:12 Πτολεμαῖος ὁ καλούμενος Μάκρων; 1 Macc 3:1; Jos., Ant. 13, 367; TestJob 1:1 Ιωβ τοῦ καλουμένου Ιωβαβ): Σίμων ὁ κ. ζηλωτής Simon the Zealot Lk 6:15. Cp. 1:36; 8:2; 22:3 (s. ἐπικαλέω 2); Ac 1:23; 13:1; 15:22 (s. ἐπικαλέω), 37.—The example of the OT (Gen 17:19; 1 Km 1:20; Hos 1:9; 1 Macc 6:17) has influenced the expr. καλεῖν τὸ ὄνομά τινος, w. the name added in the acc. καλέσεις τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ Ἰησοῦν Mt 1:21; GJs 11:3; 14:2. Cp. Mt 1:23 (Is 7:14), 25; Lk 1:13, 31. Pass. Lk 2:21; Rv 19:13.
    ⓓ Very oft. the emphasis is to be placed less on the fact that names are such and such, than on the fact that the bearers of the name actually are what the name says about them. The pass. be named thus approaches closely the mng. to be, and it must be left to the sensitivity of the interpreter whether this transl. is to be attempted in any individual case (Quint. Smyrn. 14, 434 οὔτʼ ἔτι σεῖο κεκλήσομαι=I do not wish any longer to be yours, i.e. your daughter). Among such pass. are these: Ναζωραῖος κληθήσεται he is to be a Nazarene Mt 2:23. υἱοὶ θεοῦ κληθήσονται 5:9; cp. vs. 19ab. υἱὸς ὑψίστου κληθήσεται (in parallelism w. ἔσται μέγας) Lk 1:32; so GJs 11:3, but without the ref. to greatness; cp. Lk 1:35, 76; 2:23. οὐκέτι εἰμὶ ἄξιος κληθῆναι υἱός σου 15:19, 21. οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανὸς καλεῖσθαι ἀπόστολος 1 Cor 15:9. ἵνα τέκνα θεοῦ κληθῶμεν, καί ἐσμέν that we should be called children of God; and so we really are 1J 3:1 (sim. Eur., Ion 309 τ. θεοῦ καλοῦμαι δοῦλος εἰμί τε; cp. Just., D. 123, 9; καλεῖσθαι beside εἶναι as Plut., Demetr. 900 [25, 6]). οἱ κεκλημένοι ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου those who are identified by the Lord’s name i.e. as Christians Hs 8, 1, 1. ἄχρις οὗ τὸ σήμερον καλεῖται as long as it is called ‘today’, as long as ‘today’ lasts Hb 3:13 (WLorimer, NTS 12, ’66, 390f, quoting Pla., Phd. 107c).—Here we may also class ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα in (through) Isaac you are to have your descendants Ro 9:7 and Hb 11:18 (Gen 21:12).
    ② to request the presence of someone at a social gathering, invite (Hom. et al.; pap; 2 Km 13:23; Esth 5:12; ISardRobert 1, ’64, p. 9, lines 1–4) τινά someone εἰς (τοὺς) γάμους to the wedding (Diod S 4, 70, 3; POxy 1487, 1 καλεῖ σε Θέων εἰς τοὺς γάμους) Mt 22:9; Lk 14:8, cp. vs. 10 (Syn. ἐρωτάω; s. three texts, invitations to the κλινή of Sarapis [ZPE 1, ’67, 121–26], two w. ἐ. and one w. καλέω New Docs 1, 5–9; on Luke’s compositional use of the meal context, s. XdeMeeûs, ETL 37, ’61, 847–70; cp. J 2:2; Rv 19:9. Abs. invite τινά someone 1 Cor 10:27 (Diog. L. 7, 184 of Chrysippus: ἐπὶ θυσίαν [sacrificial meal] ὑπὸ τῶν μαθητῶν κληθῆναι); priests to a child’s birthday GJs 6:2. Cp. Lk 7:39; 14:9, 12f, 16. οἱ κεκλημένοι the invited guests (Damox. Com. [IV/III B.C.] Fgm. 2, 26 K. in Athen. 3, 59, 102c τ. κεκλημένον; Jos., Ant. 6, 48; 52); Mt 22:3b (οἱ κεκλημένοι εἰς τ. γάμους as Diphilus Com. [IV/III B.C.] Fgm. 17, 1), 4, 8; Lk 14:7, 17; cp. vs. 24. ὁ κεκληκώς, the host 14:10 (s. above).—If αὐτοῦ Mk 2:15 refers to Jesus’ home, κ. in vs. 17 registers the double sense of an invitation to dinner and receipt of Messianic benefits, w. Jesus as host (s. AMcNeile, Mt ’57, 118); difft. Lk 5:27–32, s. 4 below. Of a follow-up invitation to guests upon completion of banquet preparations Mt 22:3a (cp. 3b below).
    ③ to use authority to have a person or group appear, summon
    ⓐ call together τινάς people: Workers to be paid Mt 20:8. Slaves to receive orders 25:14; Lk 19:13. Shepherds GJs 4:3. τὰς θυγατέρας τῶν Ἑβραίων for Mary’s diversion 6:1; 7:2. τὰς παρθένους Ox 404 recto, 21 (Hs 113, 5); GJs 10:1. Guests Mt 22:3a (s. 2 end).
    ⓑ summon τινά someone (Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 82 §347; 4, 86 §362; 1 Macc 1:6) ἀπέστειλαν πρὸς αὐτὸν καλοῦντες αὐτόν they sent to him to summon him Mk 3:31. Cp. Mt 2:7; 22:3a. Of Joseph ἐκάλεσεν αὐτήν GJs 13:2 (for the context cp. Mt 1:18f). Of God: the Israelites fr. Egypt (as a type of Christ) Mt 2:15.— Call upon (Himerius, Or. 48 [=Or. 14], 10; 4 Macc 3:19) Hb 11:8.
    ⓒ a legal t.t. call in, summon before a court (oft. pap) τινά someone (Jos., Ant. 14, 169) Ac 4:18; 24:2.—The transition to mng. 4 is well illustrated by Mt 4:21; Mk 1:20; Papias (8), where the summons is also a call to discipleship.
    ④ From the mngs. ‘summon’ and ‘invite’ there develops the extended sense choose for receipt of a special benefit or experience, call (Paus. 10, 32, 13 οὓς ἂν ἡ ῏Ισις καλέσῃ διʼ ἐνυπνίων; Ael. Aristid. 30, 9 K.=10 p. 116 D.: ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ κληθείς) καλούμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ Hb 5:4. τινὰ εἴς τι someone to someth., in the usage of the NT, as well as that of the LXX, of the choice of pers. for salvation: God (much more rarely Christ) calls εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ βασιλείαν καὶ δόξαν 1 Th 2:12; εἰς τὴν αἰώνιον αὐτοῦ δόξαν 1 Pt 5:10. εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 Ti 6:12. εἰς κοινωνίαν τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ to fellowship with his son 1 Cor 1:9. ἐκ σκότους εἰς τὸ αὐτοῦ φῶς from darkness to his light 1 Pt 2:9. ἀπὸ σκότους εἰς φῶς 1 Cl 59:2. διὰ τ. χάριτος αὐτοῦ Gal 1:15. for this God called you through our proclamation, namely to obtain the glory 2 Th 2:14; cp. 1 Th 2:12. καλέσαντι … εἰς τὴν μερίδα τοῦ κλήρους τῶν ἁγίων Col 1:12 v.l. (for ἱκανώσαντι). Without further modification Ro 8:30; 9:24; 1 Cor 7:17f, 20–22, 24; Eph 1:11 v.l.; 2 Cl 9:5; 10:1.—κ. κλήσει ἁγίᾳ call with a holy calling 2 Ti 1:9. ἀξίως τῆς κλήσεως ἧς (attraction, instead of ἣν) ἐκλήθητε worthily of the calling by which you were called Eph 4:1 (on the constr. s. W-S. §24, 4b; Rob. 478). Of God: ὁ καλῶν τινά Gal 5:8; 1 Th 5:24. Abs. ὁ καλῶν Ro 9:12. ὁ καλέσας τινά Gal 1:6; 1 Pt 1:15; 2 Pt 1:3. Likew. of Christ ὁ καλέσας τινά 2 Cl 5:1 (Just., A I, 15, 7). Pass. οἱ κεκλημένοι those who are called Hb 9:15. κεκλημένοι ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ διʼ αὐτοῦ (=Ἰ. Χρ.) 1 Cl 65:2. οἱ κεκλημένοι ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ (=υἱοῦ τ. θεοῦ) Hs 9, 14, 5. οἱ κληθέντες Hm 4, 3, 4. S. also 1d.—More closely defined: ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ B 14:7 (Is 42:6). ἐπʼ ἐλευθερίᾳ (s. ἐλευθερία) Gal 5:13. οὐκ ἐπὶ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ ἀλλʼ ἐν ἁγιασμῷ not for impurity, but in consecration 1 Th 4:7. ἐν εἰρήνῃ in peace 1 Cor 7:15. ἐκλήθητε ἐν μιᾷ ἐλπίδι τῆς κλήσεως ὑμῶν you were called in the one hope that you share in your call Eph 4:4. ἡμεῖς διὰ θελήματος αὐτου (=θεοῦ) ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ κληθέντες 1 Cl 32:4. εἰς εἰρήνην τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐν ἐνὶ σώματι Col 3:15. ἐν τῇ σαρκί 2 Cl 9:4. ἐν Ἰσαάκ Hb 11:18 (=Ro 9:7). πόθεν ἐκλήθημεν καὶ ὑπὸ τίνος καὶ εἰς ὸ̔ν τόπον 2 Cl 1:2. εἰς τοῦτο ἵνα for this reason, that 1 Pt 3:9; cp. 2:21. Of Christ: οὐκ ἦλθον καλέσαι δικαίους ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς (+ εἰς μετάνοιαν v.l.) Mt 9:13; Mk 2:17 (on a prob. double sense in this pass. s. 2); 2 Cl 2:4; cp. vs. 7 (cp. Just., A I, 40, 7 εἰς μετάνοιαν καλεῖ πάντας ὁ θεός); Lk 5:32 (ἐλήλυθα … εἰς μετάνοιαν). Of God: ἐκάλεσεν ἡμᾶς οὐκ ὄντας he called us when we did not exist 2 Cl 1:8. ὁ καλῶν τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα the one who calls into being what does not exist Ro 4:17 (Philo, Spec. Leg. 4, 187 τὰ μὴ ὄντα ἐκάλεσεν εἰς τὸ εἶναι; cp. Is 41:4; 48:13).—Of the call to an office by God Hb 5:4.—JHempel, Berufung u. Bekehrung (also GBeer Festschr.) ’35; HWildberger, Jahwes Eigentumsvolk ’60.—B. 1276. DELG. EDNT. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > καλέω

  • 75 παρατίθημι

    παρατίθημι (s. παραθήκη; Hom.+) fut. παραθήσω; 1 aor. παρέθηκα; 2 aor. subj. παραθῶ, inf. παραθεῖναι Lk 9:16 and-θῆναι Mk 8:7 v.l. Mid.: fut. παραθήσομαι Ps 30:6; 2 aor. παρεθέμην, impv. παράθου 2 Tim 2:2. Pass.: 1 aor. παρετέθην. Prim. mng.: ‘place beside, place before’.
    ① to place someth. before someone, set before, freq. of food (Hom. et al.; LXX; Abercius ins 13 τροφήν) τινὶ someone (Gen 18:8) Mk 6:41; 8:6b; Lk 9:16. τὶ someth. (Gen 43:31) Mk 8:7. τινί τι someth. to someone (Theophr., Char. 10; 30 ἄρτους ἱκανούς; Diod S 21, 12, 5; Gen 24:33; 2 Km 12:20; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 14 Jac.) Lk 11:6. Abs. Mk 8:6a. π. τράπεζαν set food before one who is being entertained (Od. 5, 92; 21, 29; JosAs 7:1; TestAbr A 6 p. 83, 11 [Stone p. 14]; Jos., Ant. 6, 338; cp. Epici, “Alcmaeon” [VI B.C.] 2, 2 p. 33 B.=p. 76 K.; s. also 2a below) Ac 16:34. Pass. αὐτοῖς ἐκέλευσε παρατεθῆναι φαγεῖν κ. πιεῖν MPol 7:2. τὰ παρατιθέμενα the food that is served/set before (X., Cyr. 2, 1, 30; Aristot., Pol. 1, 6; Bel 21, cp. 18; Pr 23:1) τὰ παρατιθέμενα ὑμῖν Lk 10:8; cp. the sing. 1 Cor 10:27.—Mid., of hospitality set, spread τράπεζαν (Diod S 34 + 35, Fgm. 2, 35; Jos., Bell. 7, 264; TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 17 [Stone p. 10]) Dg 5:7.
    ⓐ act. put before τὶ someth. (X., Cyr. 1, 6, 14; Lucian, Rh. Pr. 9 παραδείγματα al.; Ex 19:7; 21:1; Just., A I, 12, 11) παραβολὴν παρέθηκεν αὐτοῖς Mt 13:24, 31.
    ⓑ mid., demonstrate, point out (POxy 33 verso III, 12; Jos., Vi. 6) διανοίγων καὶ παρατιθέμενος ὅτι Ac 17:3.—28:23 v.l.
    ③ to entrust for safekeeping, give over, entrust, commend, mid. (Ps.-X., Rep. Ath. [the Old Oligarch] 2, 16; Polyb. 33, 12, 3; Plut., Num. 66 [9, 10]; oft. pap; Tob 1:14; 4:1, 20; 1 Macc 9:35; ApcEsdr 6:17).
    ⓐ τί τινι entrust someth. to someone ᾧ παρέθεντο πολύ Lk 12:48. For safekeeping or transmission to others 1 Ti 1:18; 2 Ti 2:2.
    ⓑ τινά τινι entrust someone to the care or protection of someone (Diod S 16, 2, 2; 17, 23, 5; PGiss 88, 5 Ἀπολλωνοῦν παρατίθεμαί σοι; PSI 96, 2; Tob 10:13; Jos., Ant. 7, 387) Hs 9, 10, 6. Of divine protection παρέθεντο αὐτοὺς τῷ κυρίῳ Ac 14:23; cp. 20:32. Sim. εἰς χεῖράς σου παρατίθεμαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου Lk 23:46; AcPl Ha 10, 22 (cp. Ps 30:6.—With this saying of Jesus cp. the subject matter of Ps.-Callisth. 3, 30, 15: in the face of death, Alexander prays: ὦ Ζεῦ, δέχου κἀμέ); cp. 1 Pt 4:19 and GDalman, Jesus-Jeshua, tr. PLevertoff, 1929, 209f.
    ④ to cause someth. to happen to someone, do (to) φοβοῦμαι, μὴ … ὑμῖν βλάβην παραθῶ I fear that I may cause you harm ITr 5:1.—M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > παρατίθημι

  • 76 περί

    περί, Thess., Delph. περ IG9(2).517.17 (iii B.C.), al., Schwyzer 323 A4 (v/iv B.C.), also [dialect] Aeol., v. infr. A. V ; Elean παρ ib.413.4: Prep. with gen., dat., and acc.:—
    A round about, all round (prop. different from ἀμφί, on both sides). (Cogn. with Skt. pári 'round about'.)
    A WITH GENITIVE,
    I of Place, sts. in Poets, round about, around,

    τετάνυστο π. σπείους ἡμερίς Od.5.68

     ;

    τείχη π. Δαρδανίας E. Tr. 818

     (lyr., s.v.l.);

    εἴλυμα π. χροός A.R.2.1129

     : rarely, like ἀμφί, on both sides, v. περιβαίνω 1 fin.
    2 about near,

    π. σοῦ πάντα γένοιτο ῥόδα IG14.2508

     ([place name] Nemausus).
    II to denote the object about or for which one does something:
    1 with Verbs of fighting or contending, π. τινός for an object—from the notion of the thing's lying in the middle to be fought about, π. τῶνδε for these prizes, Il.23.659 ;

    π. πτόλιος.. μαχήσεται 18.265

     ; π. Πατρόκλοιο θανόντος ib. 195, cf. 17.120;

    π. σεῖο 3.137

     ;

    π. νηὸς ἔχον πόνον 15.416

    ; ἀμύνεσθαι π. πάτρης, π. νηῶν, π. τέκνων, 12.243, 142, 170, etc.; δόλους καὶ μῆτιν ὕφαινον, ὥς τε π. ψυχῆς since it was for my life, Od.9.423 ;

    π. ψυχῆς θέον Ἕκτορος Il.22.161

     ;

    π. ψυχέων ἐμάχοντο Od.22.245

    ; in Prose, τρέχειν π. ἑωυτοῦ, π. τῆς ψυχῆς, Hdt.7.57,9.37;

    ἀγῶνας δραμέονται π. σφέων αὐτῶν Id.8.102

    ;

    νεναυμάχηκε τὴν π. τῶν κρεῶν Ar. Ra. 191

     ; <

    τὸν> π. τοῦ παντὸς δρόμον θέοντες Hdt.8.74

    ; κινδυνεύειν π. τινός ibid., etc.;

    οὐ π. τῶν ἴσων ὁ κίνδυνός ἐστι X.HG7.1.7

    ; and without a Verb,

    π. γῆς ὅρων διαφοραί Th.1.122

    ;

    π. πάντων ἀγαθῶν ὁ ἀγών X.Cyr. 3.3.44

    , cf. S.Aj. 936(lyr.), etc.;

    μάχη π. τινός Pl.Tht. 179d

     ;

    ἐπειγόμενοι π. νίκης Il.23.437

    , cf. 639, Hdt.8.26 ;

    πεῖραν θανάτου π. καὶ ζωᾶς ἀναβάλλεσθαι Pi.N.9.29

     ;

    π. θανάτου φεύγειν Antipho 5.95

     ; but ἐρίσσαι π. μύθων contend about speaking, i. e. who can speak best, Il.15.284 ;

    καὶ ἀθανάτοισιν ἐρίζεσκον π. τόξων Od.8.225

    , cf. 24.515.
    2 with words which denote care or anxiety, about, on account of,

    π. Τρώων.. μερμηρίζειν Il.20.17

    ;

    ἄχος π. τινός Od.21.249

     ;

    φόνου π. βουλεύειν 16.234

     ;

    φροντίζειν π. τινός Hdt.8.36

    , etc.;

    κήδεσθαι π. τ. S.Ph. 621

     ;

    δεδιέναι π. τ. Pl.Prt. 320a

    , etc.;

    ἀπολογεῖσθαι π. τ. X.Cyr.2.2.13

    ; κρίνειν, διαγιγνώσκειν π. τ., Pi.N.5.40, Antipho 5.96; π. τ. ψηφίζεσθαι, διαψηφίζεσθαι, ψῆφον φέρειν, IG12.57.42, X.HG2.3.50, Lycurg.11 ;

    βουλεύεσθαι π. τῆς κοινῆς σωτηρίας Isoc.5.69

     ;

    π. Μεθωναίων IG12.57.49

     ; διανοεῖσθαι, σκοπεῖν π. τινός, Pl.Phdr. 270d, Phd. 65e;

    μαντεύεσθαι π. τ. Hdt.8.36

    , cf. S.Tr.77 ; π. πότου γοῦν ἐστί σοι; so with you it is a question of drink? Ar.Eq.87, cf. Plu.2.43b.
    3 with Verbs of hearing, knowing, speaking, etc., about, concerning,

    π. νόστου ἄκουσα Od.19.270

     ;

    οἶδα γὰρ εὖ π. κείνου 17.563

     ;

    π. πομπῆς μνησόμεθα 7.191

     ;

    π. πατρὸς ἐρέσθαι 1.135

    , 3.77 ; π. τινὸς ἐρέειν, λέγειν, λόγον ποιήσασθαι, etc., Hdt. 1.5, S.OT 707, X.Cyr.1.6.13, etc.;

    λέγειν καὶ ἀκούειν π. ἑκάστου Th.4.22

    , etc.;

    λόγος π. τινός Pl.Prt. 347b

    , etc.;

    ἡ π. τινὸς φήμη Aeschin.1.48

     ; π. τινὸς ἀγγεῖλαι, κηρῦξαι, S.El. 1111, Ant. 193 ; π. τινὸς διελθεῖν, διεξελθεῖν, διηγεῖσθαι, Isoc.9.2, Pl.Plt. 274b, Euthphr.6c, etc.;

    παίζειν π. τινός X.Mem.1.3.8

    ;

    ἐμπειροτέρως ἔχειν π. τινός Aeschin.1.82

    ;

    νόμον γράψαι π. τινός X.HG2.3.52

    , etc.;

    νόμῳ χρῆσθαι π. τινός S.Ant. 214

    .
    4 of impulse or motive rather than object, ἐμαρνάσθην ἔριδος πέρι fought for very enmity, Il.7.301, cf. 16.476, 20.253.
    5 about, in regard to,

    μεμηνυμένος π. τινός Th.6.53

     ;

    οὕτως ἔσχε π. τοῦ πρήγματος τούτου Hdt.1.117

    ;

    τὰ π. τῶν Πλαταιῶν γεγενημένα Th.2.6

    ;

    τὸ π. τούτου γεγονός Plb.1.54.5

     : in Prose freq. without a Verb,

    ἡ π. τῶν Μαντινικῶν πρᾶξις Th.6.88

     ; τὰ π. τινός the circumstances of.., ib.32, 8.14,26, etc. (cf. infr. C. 1.5); οὕτω δὴ καὶ π. τῶν ἀρετῶν (sc. ἔχει) Pl.Men. 72c, cf. R. 534b, 551c, etc.; π. τοῦ καταλειφθῆναι τὸν σῖτον as for reserving the corn, PMich.Zen.28.5 (iii B.C.): without the Art., ἀριθμοῦ πέρι as to number, Hdt.7.102; χρηστηρίων δὲ πέρι .. Id.2.54.
    III before, above, beyond, of superiority, chiefly in [dialect] Ep.,

    π. πάντων ἔμμεναι ἄλλων Il.1.287

    ;

    π. δ' ἄλλων φασὶ γενέσθαι 4.375

    ;

    τετιμῆσθαι π. πάντων 9.38

    ;

    ὃν π. πάσης τῖεν ὁμηλικίης 5.325

     ;

    ὃν.. π. πάντων φίλατο παίδων 20.304

    ;

    π. πάντων ἴδριες ἀνδρῶν Od.7.108

    ;

    κρατερὸς π. πάντων Il.21.566

    , cf. 1.417, Od.11.216: in this sense freq. divided from its gen., π. φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων in understanding to be beyond them, Il.17.171, cf. 1.258, Od.1.66 ;

    π. μὲν εἶδος, π. δ' ἔργα τέτυκτο τῶν ἄλλων Δαναῶν Il.17.279

     ;

    π. μὲν κρατέεις, π. δ' αἴσυλα ῥέζεις ἀνδρῶν 21.214

     ;

    π. δ' ἔγχει Ἀχαιῶν φέρτατός ἐσσι 7.289

    , cf. Pi.O.6.50, Theoc. 25.119.—In this sense π. is sts. adverbial, and the gen. is absent, v. infr. E. II.
    IV in Hdt. and [dialect] Att. Prose, to denote value, ἡμῖν π. πολλοῦ ἐστι it is of much consequence, worth much, to us, Hdt.1. 120, cf. Antipho 6.3 ; π. πολλοῦ ποιεῖσθαί τινας to reckon them for, i.e. worth, much, Hdt.1.73, X.Mem.2.3.10, etc.; π. πλείονος, π. πλείστου ποιεῖσθαι, Id.An.7.7.44, Cyr.7.5.60 ;

    π. πλείστου ἡγεῖσθαι Th.2.89

     ;

    π. παντὸς ποιεῖσθαι X.Cyr.1.4.1

     ; π. ἐλάττονος ἡγούμενοι, π. οὐδενὸς ἡγήσασθαι, Lys.2.71,31.31.
    V [dialect] Aeol. περί and περ = ὑπέρ, στροῦθοι περὶ γᾶς.. δίννεντες πτέρα Sapph.1.10; περ κεφάλας prob. in Alc.93, cf. 18 ;

    περρ ἁπαλῶ στύματός σε πεδέρχομαι Theoc.29.25

    ; also Hellenistic, ὃ διέγραψε Προῖτος περί μου paid on my behalf, PCair. Zen.790.23 (iii B. C.), cf. UPZ57.12 (ii B. C.).
    B WITH DATIVE (in [dialect] Att. Prose mostly in signf. 11, esp. in Th.),
    I of Place, round about, around, of close-fitting dresses, armour, etc.,

    ἔνδυνε π. στήθεσσι χιτῶνα Il.10.21

     ;

    χιτῶνα π. χροῒ δῦνεν Od.15.60

     ;

    δύσετο τεύχεα καλὰ π. χροΐ Il.13.241

     ;

    ἕσσαντο π. χροῒ χαλκόν Od.24.467

    ;

    κνημῖδας.. π. κνήμῃσιν ἔθηκε Il.11.17

     ;

    βεβλήκει τελαμῶνα π. στήθεσσι 12.401

     : in Prose,

    π. τῇσι κεφαλῇσι εἶχον τιάρας Hdt.7.61

    ;

    θώρακα π. τοῖς στέρνοις ἔχειν X.Cyr.1.2.13

    ; οἱ στρεπτοὶ οἱ π. τῇ δέρῃ καὶ τὰ ψέλια π. ταῖς χερσί ib.1.3.2. ;

    π. τῇ χειρὶ δακτύλιον ὄντα Pl.R. 359e

    , etc.;

    χαλκὸς ἔλαμπε π. στήθεσσι Il.13.245

    ;

    χιτῶνα π. στήθεσσι δαΐξαι 2.416

     ;

    πήληξ.. κονάβησε π. κροτάφοισι 15.648

    ; in other relations, π. δ' ἔγχεϊ χεῖρα καμεῖται will grow weary by grasping the spear, 2.389 ;

    δράκων ἑλισσόμενος π. χειῇ 22.95

     ;

    κνίση ἑλισσομένη π. καπνῷ 1.317

    ;

    π. σταχύεσσιν ἐέρση 23.598

    ;

    μάρναντο π. Σκαιῇσι πύλῃσιν 18.453

     : rarely in Trag.,

    π. βρέτει πλεχθείς A.Eu. 259

     (lyr.);

    κεῖται νεκρὸς π. νεκρῷ S.Ant. 1240

    .
    2 in Poets, also, around a weapon, i. e. spitted upon it, transfixed by it,

    π. δουρὶ πεπαρμένη Il.21.577

    ;

    ἐρεικόμενος π. δουρί 13.441

     ;

    κυλινδόμενος π. χαλκῷ 8.86

     ;

    π. δουρὶ ἤσπαιρε 13.570

    ;

    πεπτῶτα π. ξίφει S.Aj. 828

    ;

    αἷμα ἐρωήσει π. δουρί Il.1.303

    .
    3 of a warrior standing over a dead comrade so as to defend him,

    ἀμφὶ δ' ἄρ' αὐτῷ βαῖν', ὥς τις π. πόρτακι μήτηρ 17.4

    ; ἑστήκει, ὥς τίς τε λέων π. οἷσι τέκεσσι ib. 133 ; Αἴας π. Πατρόκλῳ.. βεβήκει ib. 137, cf. 355 ;

    π. σκύμνοισι βεβηκώς Ar.Eq. 1039

    .
    II of an object for or about which one struggles (cf. supr. A. 11.1),

    π. οἷσι μαχειόμενος κτεάτεσσι Od.17.471

     ;

    μαχήσασθαι π. δαιτί 2.245

     ;

    π. παιδὶ μάχης πόνος Il.16.568

     ;

    ἄνδρα π. ᾗ πατρίδι μαρνάμενον Tyrt.10.2

    ;

    π. τοῖς φιλτάτοις κυβεύειν Pl.Prt. 314a

     ;

    π. τῇ Σικελίᾳ ἔσται ὁ ἀγών Th.6.34

     codd.;

    κινδυνεύειν π. αὑτῷ Antipho 5.6

    .
    2 with Verbs denoting care, anxiety, or the opposite (cf. supr. A. 11.2),

    π. γὰρ δίε ποιμένι λαῶν, μή τι πάθοι Il.5.566

     ;

    ἔδεισεν δὲ π. ξανθῷ Μενελάῳ 10.240

    , cf. 11.557;

    δεδιότες π. τῷ χωρίῳ Th.1.60

    , cf. 74, 119, Ar.Eq.27;

    θαρρεῖν π. τῇ ἑαυτοῦ ψυχῇ Pl.Phd. 114d

    , cf. Tht. 148c;

    π. πλέγματι γαθεῖ Theoc.1.54

    .
    3 generally, of the cause or occasion, on account of, by reason of, ἀτύζεσθαι π. καπνῷ, v.l. for ὑπὸ καπνοῦ in Il.8.183;

    μὴ π. Μαρδονίῳ πταίσῃ ἡ Ἑλλάς Hdt.9.101

    ;

    π. σφίσιν αὐτοῖς πταῖσαι Th.6.33

     ;

    π. αὑτῷ σφαλῆναι Id.1.69

     : in Poets, π. δείματι for fear, Pi.P.5.58 ; π. τιμᾷ in honour or praise, ib.2.59; π. τάρβει, π. φόβῳ, A.Pers. 696 (lyr.), Ch.35(lyr.);

    π. χάρματι h.Cer. 429

    :—but π. θυμῷ is f.l. in Hdt.3.50.
    C WITH ACCUSATIVE,
    I of Place, prop. of the object round about which motion takes place, π. βόθρον ἐφοίτων came flocking round the pit, Od.11.42 ;

    π. νεκρὸν ἤλασαν ἵππους Il.23.13

     ;

    π. τέρματα ἵπποι τρωχῶσι 22.162

     ; ἄστυ πέρι.. διώκειν ib. 173, 230 ;

    ἐρύσας π. σῆμα 24.16

    , cf. 51, etc.;

    π. φρένας ἤλυθ' ἰωή 10.139

     ;

    π. φρένας ἤλυθε οἶνος Od.9.362

     : also of extension round, ἑστάμεναι π. τοῖχον, π. βωμόν, Il.18.374, Od.13.187, etc.;

    λέξασθαι π. ἄστυ Il.8.519

     ;

    μάρνασθαι π. ἄ. 6.256

    , etc.;

    φυλάσσοντας π. μῆλα 12.303

    ; οἳ π. Πηνειὸν.. ναίεσκον, π. Δωδώνην.. οἰκί' ἔθεντο, 2.757, 750;

    σειρήν κεν π. ῥίον Οὐλύμποιο δησαίμην 8.25

    , cf. Od.18.67: in Prose,

    ἰκριῶσαι π. τὼ ἀγάλματε IG12.371.22

    ;

    φυλακὰς δεῖ π. τὸ στρατόπεδον εἶναι X.An. 5.1.9

    ; π. τὴν κρήνην εὕδειν somewhere near it, Pl.Phdr. 259a, cf. X.Cyr. 1.2.9;

    εἶναι π. τὸν λαγώ Id.Cyn.4.4

    ; π. λίθον πεσών upon it, Ar.Ach. 1180; π. αὑτὰ καταρρεῖν collapse upon themselves, D.2.10;

    ταραχθεῖσαι [αἱ νῆες] π. ἀλλήλας Th.7.23

    ; πλεῦνες π. ἕνα many to one, Hdt.7.103 ; π. τὸν ἄρξαντα.. τὸ ἀδίκημά ἐστι is imputable to him who.., Antipho 4.4.2 : freq. with a Subst. only, ἡ π. Λέσβον ναυμαχία the sea-fight off Lesbos, X.HG2.3.32 ;

    οἱ π. τὴν Ἔφεσον Pl.Tht. 179e

    ;

    στρατηγοὶ π. Πελοπόννησον IG12.324.18

     : strengthd.,

    π. τ' ἀμφί τε τάφρον Il.17.760

    ;

    π. τ' ἀμφί τε κύματα Hes.Th. 848

     ; cf. ἀμφί c. 1.2.
    2 of persons who are about one,

    ἔχειν τινὰ π. αὑτόν X.HG5.3.22

     ; esp. οἱ π. τινά a person's attendants, connexions, associates, or colleagues,

    οἱ π. τὸν Πείσανδρον πρέσβεις Th.8.63

     ; οἱ π. Ἡράκλειτον his school, Pl.Cra. 440c, cf. X.An.1.5.8, etc.; οἱ π. Ἀρχίαν πολέμαρχοι Archias and his colleagues, Id.HG5.4.2, cf. An.2.4.2, etc.; οἱ π. τινά so-and-so and his family, PGrenf.1.21.16 (ii B.C.), etc.; later οἱ π. τινά, periphr. for the person himself, οἱ π. Φαβρίκιον Fabricius, Plu.Pyrrh.20, cf. Tim.13, IGRom.3.883.14 (Tarsus, ii/iii A.D.); cf. ἀμφί C. 1.3.
    3 of the object about which one is occupied or concerned, π. δόρπα πονεῖσθαι, π. δεῖπνον πένεσθαι, Il.24.444, Od.4.624 (but π. τεύχε' ἕπουσι, tmesis for περιέπουσι, Il.15.555); later mostly εἶναι π. τι, Th.7.31, X.HG2.2.4;

    γενέσθαι Isoc.3.12

    ; π. γυναῖκας γενέσθαι Vett. Val.17.20;

    ὄντων ἡμῶν π. ταύτην τὴν πραγματείαν D.48.6

    ;

    διατρῖψαι π. τὴν θήραν X.Cyr.1.2.11

    , etc.: less freq.

    ἔχειν π. τινάς Id.HG7.4.28

    , Gal.15.442; in periphr. phrases, οἱ π. τὴν ποίησιν καὶ τοὺς λόγους ὄντες poets and orators, Isoc.12.35 ;

    οἱ π. τὴν φιλοσοφίαν ὄντες Id.9.8

    ; οἱ π. τὴν μουσικήν ib.4 ; οἱ π. τὰς τελετάς ministers of the mysteries, Pl.Phd. 69c ; ὁ π. τὸν ἵππον the groom, X. Eq.6.3; cf. ἀμφί C. 1.6.
    4 round or about a place, and so in,

    π. νῆσον ἀλώμενοι Od.4.368

    , cf. 90;

    ἐμέμηκον π. σηκούς 9.439

     ; ἃν π. ψυχὰν γάθησεν in his heart, Pi.P.4.122 ;

    χρονίζειν π. Αἴγυπτον Hdt.3.61

    , cf. 7.131;

    εὕροι ἄν τις [βασιλείας] π. τοὺς βαρβάρους Pl.R. 544d

    , etc.; οἱ

    π. Φωκίδα τόποι Plb.5.24.12

    , etc.
    5 about, in the case of, τὰ π. τὴν Αἴγυπτον γεγονότα, τὰ π. Μίλητον γενόμενα, Hdt.3.13, 6.26 ;

    εὐσεβεῖν π. θεούς Pl.Smp. 193a

     ;

    ἀσεβεῖν π. ξένους X.Cyr.5.2.10

     ;

    ἁμαρτάνειν π. τινάς Id.An.3.2.20

    ;

    ἀνήρ ἐστιν ἀγαθὸς π. τὸν δῆμον τὸν Ἀθηναίων IG12.59.10

     ;

    ἄνδρ' ἀγαθὸν ὄντα Μαραθῶνι π. τὴν πόλιν Ar.Ach. 696

     ;

    τοιαύτην γνώμην ἔχειν π. τὸν πατέρα Lys.10.21

     ;

    οὐδεμία συμφορὴ.. ἔσται.. π. οἶκον τὸν σόν Hdt.8.102

     ; ποιέειν or πράττειν τι π. τινά, Id.1.158, Pl.Grg. 507a;

    τὰ π. Πρηξάσπεα πρηχθέντα Hdt.3.76

     ;

    καινοτομεῖν π. τὰ θεῖα Pl. Euthphr.3b

     ;

    π. θεοὺς μὴ σωφρονεῖν X.Mem.1.1.20

     ; σπουδάζειν π. τινά promote his cause, Isoc.1.10: without a Verb,

    αἱ π. τοὺς παῖδας συμφοραί X.Cyr.7.2.20

    ;

    ἡ π. αὑτὸν ἐπιμέλεια Isoc.9.2

    ;

    ἡ π. ἡμᾶς ἡνιόχησις Pl.Phdr. 246b

    : generally, of all relations, about, concerning, in respect of,

    π. μὲν τοὺς ἰχθύας οὕτως ἔχει Hdt.2.93

    , cf. 8.86;

    πονηρὸν π. τὸ σῶμα Pl.Prt. 313d

    ;

    ἀκόλαστος π. ταῦτα Aeschin.1.42

     ; γελοῖος π. τὰς διατριβάς ib.126 ;

    ξυνηνέχθη θόρυβος π. τὸν Ἀστύοχον Th.8.84

    ; as to (cf. A. 11.5),

    π. τὸ παρὸν πάθος Pl.Tht. 179c

    , cf. Phd. 65a : freq. in place of an Adj., ὄργανα ὅσα π. γεωργίαν, i.e. γεωργικά, Id.R. 370d ;

    οἱ νόμοι οἱ π. τοὺς γάμους Id.Cri. 50d

     ;

    αἱ π. τὰ μαθήματα ἡδοναί Id.Phlb. 51e

     ; also in place of a gen., οἱ π. Αυσίαν λόγοι the speeches of L., Id.Phdr. 279a; ἡ π. Φίλιππον τυραννίς the despotism of P., X.HG5.4.2 ;

    ἀκρασίας τῆς π. τὸν θυμόν Arist.EN 1149b19

     : in Prose, to denote circumstances connected with any person or thing, τὰ π. Κῦρον, τὰ π. Ἑλένην, τὰ π. Βάττον, Hdt.1.95, 2.113, 4.154 ; τὰ π. τὸν Ἄθων the works at Mount Athos, Id.7.37; τὰ π. τὰς ναῦς naval affairs, Th.1.13; τὰ π. τὴν ναυμαχίαν (v.l. for τῆς ναυμαχίας ) the events of.., Id.8.63;

    τὰ π. τὸν πόλεμον Pl.R. 468a

    ;

    τὰ π. τὸ σῶμα Id.Phdr. 246d

    ;

    τὰ π. τοὺς θεούς X.Cyr.8.1.23

    , etc.; cf. ἀμφί c.1.4.
    II of Time, π. λύχνων ἁφάς about the time of lamp-lighting, Hdt.7.215; π. μέσας νύκτας about midnight, X.An.1.7.1; π. πλήθουσαν ἀγοράν ib.2.1.7; π. ἡλίου δυσμάς ib.6.5.32 ;

    π. τούτους τοὺς χρόνους Th.3.89

    , etc.
    2 of round numbers, π. ἑβδομήκοντα about seventy, Id.1.54;

    π. ἑπτακοσίους X.HG2.4.5

    , etc.
    D Position: π. may follow its Subst., when it suffers anastrophe,

    ἄστυ πέρι Il.22.173

    ;

    ἔριδος πέρι 16.476

    : most freq. with gen.,

    τοῦδε πράγματος πέρι A.Eu. 630

    ;

    τῶνδε βουλεύειν πέρι Id.Th. 248

    , etc. (S. only once uses it before its gen., Aj. 150 (anap.)): in Prose,

    σφέων αὐτῶν πέρι Hdt.8.36

    ;

    σοφίας πέρι Pl.Phlb. 49a

    ;

    δικαίων τε πέρι καὶ ἀδίκων Id.Grg. 455a

    , etc.;

    γραμμάτων εἴπομεν ὡς οὐχ ἱκανῶς ἔχεις πέρι Id.Lg. 809e

    , cf. Ap. 19c.
    E περί abs., as ADV., around, about, also, near, by, freq. in Hom.,

    γέλασσε δὲ πᾶσα π. χθών Il.19.362

    , al.: strengthd.,

    περί τ' ἀμφί τε κάλλος ἄητο

     round about,

    h.Cer.276

    , cf. Call.Hec.1.1.13.
    2 π. does not suffer anastrophe in the [dialect] Ep. phrase π. κῆρι right heartily,

    π. κῆρι φίλησε Il.13.430

    , etc. ( κῆρι φιλεῖν alone, 9.117);

    ἀπέχθωνται π. κῆρι 4.53

    ; π. κῆρι τιέσκετο ib.46, cf. Od.5.36, 7.69;

    π. κῆρι.. ἐχολώθη Il.13.206

    ; also

    π. φρεσὶν ἄσπετος ἀλκή 16.157

    ;

    π. φρεσὶν αἴσιμα ᾔδη Od.14.433

    ;

    ἀλύσσοντες π. θυμῷ Il.22.70

    , cf. Od.14.146;

    π. σθένεϊ Il.17.22

    .
    4 περὶ κάτω bottom upwards,

    δῖνος π. κάτω τετραμμένος Stratt.34

    , cf. Phot.;

    τὴν κόγχην στρέψας π. τὰ κάτω Ael.NA9.34

    .
    F IN COMPOS. all its chief senses recur, esp.
    I extension in all directions as from a centre, all round, as in περιβάλλω, περιβλέπω, περιέχω.
    II completion of an orbit and return to the same point, about, as in περιάγω, περιβαίνω, περίειμι ( εἶμι ibo), περιέρχομαι, περιστρέφω.
    III a going over or beyond, above, before, as in περιβαίνω III, περιβάλλω v, περιγίγνομαι, περιεργάζομαι, περιτοξεύω.
    IV generally, a strengthening of the simple notion, beyond measure, very, exceedingly, as in περικαλλής, περίκηλος, περιδείδω, like Lat. per-.
    V the notion of double-ness which belongs to ἀμφί is found in only one poetic compd., περιδέξιος (q.v.).
    G PROSODY: περί never suffers elision in Il. or Od. (

    περ' ἰγνύσι h.Merc. 152

    ); once in Hes.,

    περίαχε Th. 678

     (cf. Q.S.3.601, 11.382), v. ἰάχω fin.;

    περ' ἰγνύῃσι Theoc.25.242

     ;

    περ' Ἠδάλιον Inscr.Cypr. 135.27

     H.; also in Pi.,

    περάπτων P.3.52

     ;

    περόδοις N.11.40

    ;

    περιδαῖος Fr. 154

     ;

    περ' αὐτᾶς P.4.265

     ;

    ταύτας περ' ἀτλάτου πάθας O.6.38

     : not in Trag. (περεβάλοντο, περεσκήνωσεν are ff. ll. in A.Ag. 1147, Eu. 634); in Com. and codd. of Prose writers only in part. of περίειμι ( εἶμι ibo) (q. v.):—π. stands before a word beginning with a vowel in Com., περὶ Ἀθηνῶν, περὶ ἐμοῦ, Ar.Eq. 1005 sq.:—[dialect] Aeol. περρ metri gr., v. A. 5.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > περί

  • 77 προέχω

    προέχω, [var] contr. [full] προὔχω, as always in Hom., exc. Od.12.11 (v. infr. B), also in S. and Th.: [tense] fut. προέξω: [tense] aor. προέσχον, [voice] Med. προεσχόμην, προὐσχόμην, cf. προΐσχω:—
    A hold before,

    τὴν ἀσπίδα τῆς κωλῆς Ar.Nu. 989

    ; esp. so as to protect another,

    τὼ χεῖρε π. X.Cyr.2.3.10

    :—[voice] Med., hold before oneself,

    προὔχοντο ἑκάστοθι ἐννέα ταύρους Od.3.8

    ; hold out before one,

    πρὸ δούρατ' ἔχοντο Il.17.355

    , cf. Hdt.2.42; προὐσχόμην σε held you out as a child (to do your needs), Ar.Nu. 1385.
    2 metaph. in [voice] Med., put forward as a pretext,

    τάδ' ἂν προὔχοιο S.Ant.80

    ; ὅπερ μάλιστα προὔχονται εἰ καθαιρεθείη, μὴ ἂν γίγνεσθαι τὸν πόλεμον the cancellation of which is the chief consideration in return for which they pretend that war would not occur, Th.1.140.
    b hold forth, offer,

    ἃ προείχοντο αὐτοῖς Id.3.68

    : προΐσχομαι (q.v.) is more usual in this sense.
    II to be possessed or informed of a thing beforehand,

    π. τῶν Ἀθηναίων οὐ φιλίας γνώμας Hdt.9.4

    , cf. D.S.31.27, D.C. 43.3.
    2 have before, ἃ προεῖχεν μισθῷ ὁ.. Πτολεμαῖος had hitherto on lease, BGU889.9 (ii A.D.), cf. Sammelb.5672.5 (ii A.D.), etc.; εἰς τοῦτο ὑπολόγησον ὃ προέχουσι what they have already received, PPetr.2p.32(iii B.C.): abs., ὁ προέχων the first recipient, Arist.EN 1164b9.
    II in running, to be the first, have the start, Il.23.325: c. gen., ἡμέρης ὁδῷ π. τῶν Περσέων keep ahead of them by a day's march, Hdt.4.120; προέχων τῶν ἄλλων [ ὁ ἵππος] getting before the rest, Id.9.22; τῇ κεφαλῇ π. beat by a head, in racing, X.Cyr.4.3.16: of Time, προεῖχε [ ἡ τριήρης] ἡμέρᾳ καὶ νυκτί started first by.., Th.3.49;

    π. εἴκοσιν ἔτεσιν Pl.Lg. 879c

    : metaph., have the advantage of,

    τινὸς τῷ διπλασίῳ Antipho3.3.2

    .
    2 of rank, c. gen., δήμου προὔχουσιν they are the first or chief of the people, h.Cer. 151; τοῦ Δωρικοῦ, τοῦ Ἰωνικοῦ [ γένεος], Hdt.1.56: abs., to be superior, Th.1.39, 3.82;

    ἀνθρωπεία φύσις πολεμία τοῦ προὔχοντος

     to all that is eminent,

    Id.3.84

    ; οἱ προὔχοντες the chief men, Id.5.17; οἱ π. [ βίοι] the principal kinds of lives, Arist.EN 1095b18.
    3 surpass, excel, Th.7.66: freq. c. gen., τὸ Ἄργος π. ἅπασι τῶν ἐν τῇ.. χώρῃ in all things, Hdt.1.1, cf. 32;

    τέχνα γὰρ τέχνας ἑτέρας προὔχει S.Ph. 138

    (lyr.);

    πολὺ προὔχουσα θεάων Call.Del. 218

    ;

    π. αὐτέων τοσοῦτον ὅσον.. Hdt.2.136

    ;

    πολλῷ π. Id.3.82

    ; π. δυνάμει, πλήθει καὶ ἐμπειρίᾳ, Th.1.18, 121;

    τοσοῦτον ἐκείνων μεγέθει π. Luc.Musc.Enc.1

    : also π. τινὸς τιμήν to be preferred to him in honour, S.Ant. 208;

    π. ἔν τινος λαμπρότητι Th.6.16

    ;

    μικρὸν π. ἐν τοῖς μεγάλοις μᾶλλον ἢ πολὺ διαφέρειν ἐν τοῖς μικροῖς Isoc.10.5

    ;

    κατά τι Luc.Am.30

    .
    b rarely c. acc. pers., X.An.3.2.19(nisi secl. [ ἡμᾶς]):—[voice] Pass., to be excelled,

    οὐθὲν π. ὑπὸ τοῦ Διός Plu.2.1038d

    ; to be in worse case, Ep.Rom.3.9.
    III impers., οὔ τι προέχει it is of no advantage, c. inf., Hdt.9.27.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > προέχω

  • 78 προΐστημι

    προΐστημι, [tense] fut. - στήσω: [tense] aor. 1 προὔστησα, part. προστήσας, inf. προστῆσαι.
    A Causal in these tenses, as also in [tense] pres. and [tense] aor. 1 [voice] Med., set before, once in Hom.,

    προστήσας [σε] πρὸ Ἀχαιῶν Τρωσὶ μάχεσθαι Il.4.156

    : c. gen., π. τὸ σῶμα τοῦ σκοποῦ put his body in the way, Antipho 3.2.4 (dub. l.), cf. Plb.1.33.7.
    2 set over, ὃν ἡ πόλις ἀξιοῖ αὑτῆς προϊστάναι, v.l. for -εστάναι, Pl.La. 197d.
    3 exhibit publicly, prostitute,

    π. ἐπ' οἰκημάτων D.Chr.7.133

    .
    II [voice] Med., mostly [tense] aor. 1, put another before oneself, choose as one's leader, Hdt.1.123, 4.80: c. gen.,

    προΐστασθαι τουτονὶ ἑαυτοῦ

     take as one's guardian,

    Pl.R. 565c

    , cf. 442a (cj.), 599a, D.59.37;

    σφῶν αὐτῶν προὐστήσαντο τιμωρὸν γενέσθαι Κηφίσιον And.1.139

    ;

    στρατηγόν τινα τοῦ πολέμου π. D.Prooem. 21

    .
    2 put before one, put in front,

    σκίπωνα προστήσασθαι Hdt.4.172

    ;

    τὰ ἅρματα X.HG4.1.18

    ; τὴν χεῖρα, so as to shade the eyes, Arist.Pr. 960a21.
    3 metaph., put forward as an excuse or pretence, use as a screen,

    τί τάδε προὐστήσω λόγῳ; E.Cyc. 319

    ;

    τὰ τῶν Ἀμφικτυόνωνδόγματα προστήσασθαι D.5.19

    , etc.: c. gen., [

    τὴν ἀτυχίαν] τῆς κακουργίας προϊστάμενος Antipho 2.3.1

    ;

    τοῦ ἀγῶνος τὴν πρὸς ἔμ' ἔχθραν προΐσταται D.18.15

    .
    4 προστησώμεθα Τύρταιον put him forward, cite him as an authority, Pl.Lg. 629a.
    7 manifest, ib. 195, al.
    B [voice] Pass., with [tense] aor. 2 [voice] Act. προὔστην: [tense] pf. προέστηκα, [ per.] 2pl.

    προέστατε Hdt.5.49

    ; inf. προεστάναι, part. προεστώς (v. infr.): [tense] fut. [tense] pf. προεστήξομαι, v. infr. 11.2:—[tense] aor. [voice] Pass. προεστάθην, v. infr.11.3:—come forward, v.l. for προς- in D.60.15.
    2 c.acc., approach as a suppliant,

    ἥ σε.. λιπαρεῖ προὔστην χερί S.El. 1378

    ; προστῆναι μέσην τράπεζαν dub. in Id.Fr.660.1 (fort. προσβῆναι):—in Hdt.1.86, προσστῆναι is restored.
    4 stand in public, be a prostitute, Aeschin.Ep.7.3, Vett. Val.16.7.
    II c. gen., to be set over, be at the head of,

    τῆς Ἑλλάδος Hdt.1.69

    , 5.49;

    τῶν Ἀρκάδων τοὺς προεστεῶτας Id.6.74

    ; esp. to be chief or leader of a party, τῶν παράλων, τῶν ἐκ τοῦ πεδίου, Id.1.59;

    τοῦ δήμου Id.3.82

    , Th.3.70, Lys. 13.7;

    ἡμῶν Ar.V. 419

    ;

    τῆς πόλεως Th.2.65

    ; π. αὐτῶν to be their ringleader, X.An.6.2.9; π. χοροῦ, στρατεύματος, Id.Mem.3.4.3; π. τῶν πολιτειῶν head the respective parties in the state, Lys.25.9, etc.: abs., οἱ προεστῶτες, [dialect] Ion. -εῶτες, the leading men,

    τῶν σκυθέων Hdt.4.79

    , cf. Th.3.11, etc.;

    οἱ προεστηκότες ἐν ταῖς πόλεσι X.HG 3.5.1

    ; οἱ ἐν ταῖς

    πόλεσι προστάντες Th.3.82

    ;

    τῷ προεστῶτι καὶ ἄρχοντι Pl.R. 428e

    .
    2 in various relations, govern, direct, οὐκ ὀρθῶς σεωυτοῦ προέστηκας you do not manage yourself well, Hdt.2.173;

    π. τῆς μεταβολῆς Th.8.75

    ;

    τοῦ ἱεροῦ X.HG3.2.31

    ;

    τοῦ ἑαυτοῦ βίου Id.Mem.3.2.2

    ;

    τοῦ πράγματος D.30.18

    ;

    προεστήξομαι τῆς χωνεύσεως PCair.Zen.481.9

     (iii B. C.); ἐργασίας, τέχνης, Plu.Per.24, Ath.13.612a;

    π. ἐνδόξου καὶ καλῆς αἱρέσεως OGI219.3

     (Ilium, iii B. C.).
    3 stand before so as to guard,

    οἱ δορυφόροι Μασίστεω προέστησαν Hdt.9.107

    , cf. E. Heracl. 306, etc.: hence, support, succour,

    πρόστητ' ἀναγκαίας τύχης S.Aj. 803

    ; ὁ προστὰς τῆς εἰρήνης the champion of peace, Aeschin.2.161; πάντων προστᾶσα [ δύναμις] Pl.Ti. 25b; π. τινός to be his protector, GDI1726.6 (Delph., ii B. C.), PFay.13.5 (ii B. C.);

    τῆς ἐναντίας π. γνώμης Plb.5.5.8

    ;

    τοῖσιν ἐχθροῖς προὐστήτην φόνου

     were the authors of..,

    S.El. 980

    ; π. [ νόσου] E.Andr. 221: abs.,

    βέλεα.. ἀρωγὰ προσταθέντα S.OT 206

    (lyr.).

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > προΐστημι

  • 79 μή

    μή (Hom.+) negative particle, ‘not’: ‘μή is the negative of will, wish, doubt. If οὐ denies the fact, μή denies the idea’ (Rob. 1167). For the Koine of the NT the usage is simplified to such a degree that οὐ is generally the neg. used w. the indicative, and μή is used w. the other moods (B-D-F §426; Rob. 1167).
    ① marker of negation, not
    ⓐ in negative clauses
    α. in conditional clauses after ἐάν Mt 5:20; 6:15; 10:13; 12:29; 18:3, 16, 35; 26:42; Mk 3:27; 7:3f; 10:30; 12:19; Lk 13:3, 5; J 3:2f, 5, 27 al. After ὸ̔ς ἄν (=ἐάν) Mt 10:14; 11:6; 19:9; Mk 6:11; 10:15; 11:23; Lk 8:18; 18:17. After ὅσοι ἄν Lk 9:5; Rv 13:15. After ὅστις ἄν Ac 3:23. After εἰ in a simple condition (B-D-F §428, 1) Lk 6:4; 1 Ti 6:3. After εἰ in a contrary to fact condition (B-D-F §428, 2; Rob. 1169) Mt 24:22; Mk 13:20; J 9:33; 15:22, 24; 18:30; 19:11; Ac 26:32; Ro 7:7. εἰ μή if not, except (that), εἰ δὲ μήγε otherwise with verb and elliptically (B-D-F §428, 3; 439, 1; Rob. 1024f; cp. POxy 1185, 30) Mt 5:13; 6:1; 9:17; 11:27; 12:4, 24 and very oft. (GHarder, 1 Cor 7:17: TLZ 79, ’54, 367–72).
    β. in purpose clauses ἵνα μή in order that…not Mt 5:29f; 7:1; 17:27; Mk 3:9; 4:12; Lk 8:10, 12; 16:28; J 3:20; 7:23; Ac 2:25 (Ps 15:8); 4:17; 24:4; Ro 11:25; 15:20 al. ὅπως μή in order that…not Mt 6:18; Lk 16:26; Ac 20:16; 1 Cor 1:29. μὴ ἵνα IRo 3:2. On the inf. w. neg. as periphrasis for purpose clauses s. below.
    γ. in result clauses ὥστε μή w. inf. foll. (cp. PHib 66, 5) so that not Mt 8:28; Mk 3:20; 1 Cor 1:7; 2 Cor 3:7; 1 Th 1:8; w. impv. foll. 1 Cor 4:5.
    δ. in interrog. clauses w. an element of doubt: δῶμεν ἢ μὴ δῶμεν; should we pay (them) or should we not? Mk 12:14.
    ε. in a few relative clauses (B-D-F §428, 4; Mlt. 171; 239f) διδάσκοντες ἃ μὴ δεῖ Tit 1:11 (cp. Lucian, Dial. Deor. 13, 1; PGM 4, 2653 ὸ̔ μὴ θέμις γενέσθαι; CPR I, 19, 17; 2 Macc 12:14; Sir 13:24). The literary language is the source of ᾧ μὴ πάρεστιν ταῦτα τυφλός ἐστιν 2 Pt 1:9, where the relat. clause has a hypothetical sense. ὅσα μὴ θέλετε Ac 15:29 D. Cp. Col 2:18 v.l. On ὸ̔ μὴ ὁμολογεῖ (v.l. ὸ̔ λύει) 1J 4:3 s. ARahlfs, TLZ 40, 1915, 525.
    ζ. in a causal clause contrary to the rule, which calls for οὐ: ὅτι μὴ πεπίστευκεν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα J 3:18 (cp. Epict. 4, 4, 8; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 217 διήμαρτον, ὅτι μὴ ταῖς ἱεραῖς ἡμῶν βίβλοις ἐνέτυχον; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 8, 4; 11, 8; 32; Ath. 14, 2 ὅτι μὴ κοινῶς ἐκείνοις θεοσεβοῦμεν; Dio Chrys. 31, 94; 110.—B-D-F §428, 5; Mlt. 171; 239; Mlt-Turner 284; Rahlfs, loc. cit.).
    ⓑ w. various moods
    α. w. inf. (B-D-F §399, 3; 400, 4; 5; Mlt-Turner 285f)
    א. after verbs expressing a negative concept, usu. omitted in translation ἀντιλέγοντες ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι Lk 20:27 (v.l. λέγοντες). ἀπαρνεῖσθαι 22:34. παραιτεῖσθαι Hb 12:19. ἐγκόπτειν τινά Gal 5:7. προσέχειν Mt 6:1. οὐ δύναμαι μὴ I can do nothing else than Ac 4:20.
    ב. gener., after verbs of saying, reporting, ordering, judging, etc.—in declarative clauses: after ἀποκρίνεσθαι Lk 20:7. λέγειν Mt 22:23; Mk 12:18; Lk 20:27 v.l.; Ac 23:8; AcPlCor 2:19. ὀμνύναι Hb 3:18. θέλειν Ro 13:3. χρηματίζεσθαι Lk 2:26.—In clauses denoting a summons or challenge: after λέγειν Mt 5:34, 39; Ac 21:4; Ro 2:22; 12:3. γράφειν 1 Cor 5:9, 11. κηρύσσειν Ro 2:21. παραγγέλλειν Ac 1:4; 4:18; 5:28, 40; 1 Cor 7:10f (w. acc.); 1 Ti 1:3; 6:17. αἰτεῖσθαι Eph 3:13. εὔχεσθαι 2 Cor 13:7 (w. acc.). χρηματίζεσθαι Mt 2:12. ἀξιοῦν Ac 15:38. βοᾶν 25:24.
    ג. after predicates that contain a judgment upon the thing expressed by the inf. (with or without the art.; cp. Just., D. 68, 8 ταῦτα τολμῶσι λέγειν μὴ οὕτως γεγράφθαι): καλόν (sc. ἐστιν) 1 Cor 7:1 (ApcEsdr 1, 6, 21); Gal 4:18; cp. Ro 14:21. ἄλογον Ac 25:27 (w. acc.). κρεῖττον ἦν 2 Pt 2:21. αἱρετώτερον ἦν αὐτοῖς τὸ μὴ γεννηθῆναι Hv 4, 2, 6. Cp. δεῖ Ac 27:21 (cp. use w. ἐχρῆν TestJob 37:6).
    ד. w. gen. of the subst. inf.: τοῦ μή that not (Lat. ne): after verbs of hindering κατέχειν Lk 4:42. παύειν 1 Pt 3:10 (Ps 33:14). καταπαύειν Ac 14:18. κωλύειν 10:47. κρατεῖσθαι Lk 24:16; cp. ἀνένδεκτόν ἐστιν τοῦ…μὴ ἐλθεῖν 17:1.—Also after other expressions: ὀφθαλμοὶ τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν, ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν eyes that should not see, ears that should not hear Ro 11:8, 10 (Ps 68:24). In place of a result clause: τοῦ μὴ εἶναι αὐτὴν μοιχαλίδα so that she commits no adultery, if... 7:3.
    ה. w. subst. inf. after prepositions: εἰς τὸ μή so that…not; to the end that…not Ac 7:19; 1 Cor 10:6; 2 Cor 4:4. W. acc. and inf. foll. 2 Th 2:2; 1 Pt 3:7.—διὰ τὸ μή because…not (PPetr II, 11, 1, 7 [III B.C.] τοῦτο δὲ γίνεται διὰ τὸ μὴ ἀθροῦν ἡμᾶς; 2 Macc 2:11; ApcMos 42 διὰ τὸ μὴ γινώσκειν; Just., D. 95, 1 διὰ τὸ μὴ πάντα φυλάξαι; Tat. 2, 1 διὰ τὸ μὴ βούλεσθαι) Mt 13:5f; Mk 4:5f; Lk 8:6; Js 4:2 (w. acc.).—πρὸς τὸ μὴ in order that…not (Ptolem. Pap. aus Alexandria 4, 3 in Witkowski p. 51 πρὸς τὸ μὴ γίνεσθαι τῷ βασιλεῖ τὸ χρήσιμον; Esth 3:13d, e; Bar 1:19; 2:5) 2 Cor 3:13; 1 Th 2:9; 2 Th 3:8.
    ו. w. dat. of the subst. inf. τῷ μή because…not 2 Cor 2:13.
    ז. w. nom. or acc. of the subst. inf. (2 Esdr 6:8; s. B-D-F §399, 3; s. Rob. 1038) Ro 14:13; 2 Cor 2:1; 10:2; 1 Th 4:6.
    β. very oft. w. the ptc., in keeping w. the tendency of later Gk. to prefer μή to οὐ; exceptions in B-D-F §430; s. Rob. 1172.
    א. μή is regularly used to negative the ptc. used w. the article, when the ptc. has a hypothet. sense or refers to no particular person, and has a general mng. (Artem. 4, 22 p. 215, 14 οἱ μὴ νοσοῦντες; ParJer 6:24 ὁ δὲ μὴ ἀκούων; Just., A I, 4, 2 τοὺς μὴ ἐλεγχομένους): ὁ μὴ ὢν μετʼ ἐμοῦ every one who is not with me Mt 12:30ab; Lk 11:23ab; ὁ μὴ πιστεύων J 3:18. πᾶς ὁ μή... Mt 7:26; 1J 3:10ab; 2J 9. πάντες οἱ μή 2 Th 2:12. μακάριοι οἱ μή J 20:29; cp. Ro 14:22. τῶν τὴν ψυχὴν μὴ δυναμένων ἀποκτεῖναι Mt 10:28b and oft.
    ב. w. the ptc. when it has conditional, causal, or concessive sense: πᾶν δένδρον μὴ ποιοῦν Mt 3:10; 7:19. Cp. 9:36; 13:19; Lk 11:24. θερίσομεν μὴ ἐκλυόμενοι we will reap, if we do not become weary (before the harvest) Gal 6:9. μὴ ὄντος νόμου when there is no law Ro 5:13. νόμον μὴ ἔχοντες although they have no law 2:14. μὴ ὢν αὐτὸς ὑπὸ νόμον though I am not under the law 1 Cor 9:20 (cp. TestAbr B 11 p. 115, 22 [Stone p. 78] μὴ ἰδὼν θάνατον). μὴ μεμαθηκώς without having learned (them) J 7:15 (cp. TestAbr B 2 p. 106, 1 [Stone p. 60] μὴ εἰδὼς τίς ἐστιν; TestJob 11:7 μὴ λαμβάνων…ἐνέχυρα; Just., A I, 5, 1 μὴ φροντίζοντες, D. 110, 2 μὴ συνιέντες). μὴ ἔχοντος δὲ αὐτοῦ ἀποδοῦναι but since he could not pay it back Mt 18:25. μὴ βουλόμενος since (God) did not wish to AcPlCor 2:12 (cp. TestAbrB 5 p. 109, 24f [Stone p. 66] μὴ θέλων…παρακοῦσαι).
    ג. when it is to be indicated that the statement has subjective validity (Just., D. 115, 3 ὡς μὴ γεγενημένου ἱερέως): ὡς μὴ λαβών as though you had not received 1 Cor 4:7. ὡς μὴ ἐρχομένου μου vs. 18.
    ד. but also very freq. where earlier Gk. would require οὐ (on developments s. Schwyzer II 595f; B-D-F §430, 3; Burton §485 [464 Z.]; cp. οὐ 2b; for μή here, cp. Just., A I, 3, 9, 3 ἄνδρες δεκαδύο…λαλεῖν μὴ δυνάμενοι; D. 85, 4 διὰ τοὺς μὴ…συνόντας ἡμῖν; Mel., P. 71, 518f): τὰ μὴ ὄντα what does not exist (in reality, not only in Paul’s opinion) Ro 4:17; 1 Cor 1:28 (Philo, Op. M. 81 τὸ τὰ μὴ ὄντα εἰς τὸ εἶναι παραγαγεῖν; Ath. 4:2 τὸ ὸ̓ν οὐ γίνεται ἀλλὰ τὸ μὴ ὄν); Hv 1, 1, 6. τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα what is unseen 2 Cor 4:18ab. τὰ μὴ δέοντα 1 Ti 5:13. τὰ μὴ καθήκοντα (3 Macc 4:16) Ro 1:28. τὰ μὴ σαλευόμενα Hb 12:27. τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν 2 Cor 5:21. τυφλὸς μὴ βλέπων Ac 13:11. S. also μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει κατενόησεν Ro 4:19 where, as oft., the main idea is expressed by the ptc.
    ⓒ in a prohibitive sense in independent clauses, to express a negative wish or a warning
    α. w. subjunctive let us not, we should not: pres. subj. μὴ γινώμεθα κενόδοξοι Gal 5:26. μὴ ἐγκακῶμεν 6:9. μὴ καθεύδωμεν 1 Th 5:6; cp. 1 Cor 5:8. W. aor. subj. μὴ σχίσωμεν αὐτόν J 19:24.
    β. w. optative (B-D-F §427, 4; Rob. 1170) μὴ αὐτοῖς λογισθείη 2 Ti 4:16 (cp. Job 27:5). ἐμοὶ δὲ μὴ γένοιτο καυχᾶσθαι Gal 6:14 (cp. 1 Macc 9:10; 13:5). Esp. in the formula μὴ γένοιτο (s. γίνομαι 4a) Lk 20:16; Ro 3:4, 31; 6:2, 15; 7:7, 13; 9:14; 11:1, 11; 1 Cor 6:15; Gal 2:17; 3:21.
    γ. w. pres. impv.
    א. to express a command that is generally valid (TestReub 2:10) μὴ γίνεσθε ὡς οἱ ὑποκριταί Mt 6:16; cp. vs. 19. μὴ μεριμνᾶτε τῇ ψυχῇ ὑμῶν vs. 25; Lk 12:22.—Mt 7:1; 10:31; 19:6; Lk 6:30; 10:4, 7; 1 Cor 6:9; 7:5, 12f, 18; Eph 4:26 (Ps 4:5), 29 and oft.
    ב. to bring to an end a condition now existing (Aeschyl., Sept. 1036; Chariton 2, 7, 5 μὴ ὀργίζου=‘be angry no longer’; PHib 56, 7 [249 B.C.]; PAmh 37, 7; POxy 295, 5; Wsd 1:12 and elsewh. LXX; TestAbr B 9 p. 113, 20 [Stone p. 74]; JosAs 14:11; GrBar 7:6 and ApcMos 16 μὴ φοβοῦ; Just., D. 87, 1 μὴ…λοιπὸν ὑπολάμβανε; Mlt. 122ff) μὴ φοβεῖσθε do not be afraid (any longer) Mt 14:27; 17:7; Lk 2:10; cp. 1:13, 30. μὴ κλαῖε do not weep (any more) 7:13; cp. 23:28 (GrBar16:1) μὴ σκύλλου do not trouble yourself (any further) 7:6; cp. 8:49 v.l. (TestAbr B 2 p. 107, 2 [Stone p. 62] μὴ σκύλλε τὸ παιδάριον).—9:50; Mk 9:39; J 2:16; 6:43. μὴ γράφε do not write (any longer)=it must no longer stand written 19:21. μή μου ἅπτου do not cling to me any longer = let go of me 20:17. μὴ γίνου ἄπιστος vs. 27.—Ac 10:15; 20:10; Ro 11:18, 20; 1 Th 5:19; Js 2:1 and oft.
    δ. w. aor. impv. (Od. 16, 301; Lucian, Paras. μὴ δότε; 1 Km 17:32; TestJob 45:1 μὴ ἐπιλάθεσθε τοῦ κυρίου) μὴ ἐπιστρεψάτω Mt 24:18; Lk 17:31b. μὴ καταβάτω Mt 24:17; Mk 13:15; Lk 17:31a. μὴ γνώτω Mt 6:3.
    ε. w. aor. subj.
    א. almost always to prevent a forbidden action fr. beginning (Plut., Alex. 696 [54, 6] μὴ φιλήσῃς=‘don’t kiss’; PPetr II, 40a, 12 [III B.C.]; POxy 744, 11; BGU 380, 19; LXX; TestAbr A 2 p. 79, 8 [Stone p. 6] μὴ ἐνέγκωσιν ἵππους; 16 p. 97, 5 [Stone p. 42] μὴ ἐκφοβήσῃς αὐτόν; TestJob 39:11 μὴ κάμητε εἰκῇ; ParJer 3:5 μὴ ἀπολέσητε τὴν πόλιν; ApcEsdr 7:11 μὴ μνησθῇς; Just., D. 137, 1 μὴ κακόν τι εἴπητε.—This is the sense of μὴ θαυμάσῃς Herm. Wr. 11, 17; s. ב below) μὴ φοβηθῇς Mt 1:20; 10:26 (JosAs 23:15; cp. TestJob 17:6 μὴ φοβηθῆτε ὅλως). μὴ δόξητε 3:9; cp. 5:17. μὴ ἅψῃ Col 2:21. μὴ ἀποστραφῇς Mt 5:42. μὴ κτήσησθε 10:9 and oft. Also w. the third pers. of the aor. subj. μή τις αὐτὸν ἐξουθενήσῃ no one is to slight him 1 Cor 16:11. μή τίς με δόξῃ εἶναι 2 Cor 11:16. μή τις ὑμᾶς ἐξαπατήσῃ 2 Th 2:3. μὴ σκληρύνητε Hb 3:8, 15 (quot. fr. Ps 94:8) is hardly a pres. subj.; it is rather to be regarded as an aor.
    ב. only rarely to put an end to a condition already existing (the pres. impv. is regularly used for this; s. above 1 cγב) (TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 19 [Stone p. 70] μὴ κλαύσῃς weep no more) μὴ θαυμάσῃς you need no longer wonder J 3:7 (‘you needn’t be surprised’: s. Mlt. 124; 126; and s. א above).
    ζ. in abrupt expressions without a verb (ParJer 1:7 μὴ κύριέ μου): μὴ ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ (we must) not (proceed against him) during the festival Mt 26:5; Mk 14:2. Cp. J 18:40. καὶ μὴ (ποιήσωμεν) Ro 3:8 (B-D-F §427, 4). μὴ ὀκνηροὶ (γίνεσθε) 12:11. Cp. 14:1; Gal 5:13; Eph 6:6 al. (B-D-F §481).
    ⓐ after verbs of fearing, etc. that…(not), lest B-D-F §370.
    α. w. pres. subj. (3 Macc 2:23) ἐπισκοποῦντες…μή τις ῥίζα…ἐνοχλῇ Hb 12:15
    β. w. aor. subj. (Pla., Apol. 1, 17a) φοβηθεὶς μὴ διασπασθῇ Ac 23:10. Also after a pres. 27:17 (cp. Tob 6:15). After βλέπειν in the mng. take care (PLond III, 964, 9 p. 212 [II/III A.D.] βλέπε μὴ ἐπιλάθῃ μηδέν) Mt 24:4; Mk 13:5; Lk 21:8; Ac 13:40; 1 Cor 10:12; Gal 5:15; Hb 12:25. σκοπῶν σεαυτὸν, μὴ καὶ σὺ πειρασθῇς Gal 6:1. στελλόμενοι τοῦτο, μή τις ἡμάς μωμήσηται 2 Cor 8:20. ὁρᾶν Mt 18:10; 1 Th 5:15. Elliptically, like an aposiopesis ὅρα μή take care! you must not do that! Rv 19:10; 22:9 (B-D-F §480, 5; Rob. 932; 1203).
    γ. w. fut. ind. instead of the subj. following (X., Cyr. 4, 1, 18 ὅρα μὴ πολλῶν ἑκάστῳ ἡμῶν χειρῶν δεήσει) βλέπετε μή τις ἔσται Col 2:8; cp. Hb 3:12
    ⓑ taking the place of a purpose clause=so that…not: w. aor. subj. Mk 13:36; Ac 27:42; 2 Cor 12:6.
    ③ marker of expectation of a negative anwer to a question (B-D-F §427, 2; 4; 440; Rob. 1168; 1175; Mlt-Turner 283).
    ⓐ in direct questions (X. Eph. 398, 26 H.; Job 1:9; 8:11; TestAbr A 2 p. 79, 9f [Stone p. 6]; B 6 p. 110, 6 [Stone p. 68]; TestJob 15, 6; 27, 1; ApcSed 7:2; ApcMos 8:27) somewhat along the lines ‘it isn’t so, is it, that...?’, with expectation of a neg. answer; in tr. the negation can in fact be variously expressed in a form suggesting that an inappropriate answer would be met with complete dismay, e.g. μή τινος ὑστερήσατε; you didn’t lack anything, did you? Lk 22:35; μὴ λίθον ἐπιδώσει αὐτῷ; will one give the person a stone? Mt 7:9; sim. vs. 10; 9:15; Mk 2:19; Lk 5:34; 11:11 v.l.; 17:9; J 3:4; 4:12, 33; 6:67; 7:35, 51f; 21:5 (cp. μήτι); Ac 7:28 (Ex 2:14), 42 (Am 5:25); Ro 3:3, 5 (cp. Job 8:3); 9:14, 20 (Is 29:16); 1 Cor 1:13; 9:8f; 10:22 al. μὴ γάρ J 7:41; 1 Cor 11:22.—In cases like Ro 10:18f; 1 Cor 9:4f μή is an interrog. word and οὐ negatives the verb. The double negative causes one to expect an affirmative answer (B-D-F §427, 2; s. Rob. 1173f; Tetrast. Iamb. 17, 2 p. 266 μὴ οὐκ ἔστι χλόη;=‘there is grass, is there not?’).
    ⓑ in indirect questions whether…not Lk 11:35 (cp. Epict. 4, 5, 18a; Arrian, Anab. 4, 20, 2 μή τι βίαιον ξυνέβη=whether anything violent has happened [hopefully not]; Jos., Ant. 6, 115).
    ④ marker of reinforced negation, in combination w. οὐ, μή has the effect of strengthening the negation (Kühner-G. II 221–23; Schwyzer II 317; Mlt. 187–92 [a thorough treatment of NT usage]; B-D-F §365; RLudwig: D. prophet. Wort 31 ’37, 272–79; JLee, NovT 27, ’85, 18–23; B-D-F §365.—Pla., Hdt. et al. [Kühner-G. loc. cit.]; SIG 1042, 16; POxy 119, 5, 14f; 903, 16; PGM 5, 279; 13, 321; LXX; TestAbr A 8 p. 85, 11 [Stone p. 46]; JosAs 20:3; GrBar 1:7; ApcEsdr 2:7; Just., D. 141, 2). οὐ μή is the most decisive way of negativing someth. in the future.
    ⓐ w. the subj.
    α. w. aor. subj. (TestAbr A 17 p. 99, 7 οὐ μὴ δυνηθῇς θεάσασθαι; JosAs 20:3; ParJer 2:5; 8:5; ApcSed 12:5; 13:6; Just., D. 141, 2; Ael. Aristid. 50, 107 K.=26 p. 533 D.: οὐ μὴ ἡμῶν καταφρονήσωσι; Diogenes, Ep. 38, 5; UPZ 62, 34; 79, 19) never, certainly not, etc. Mt 5:18, 20, 26; 24:2; Mk 13:2; Lk 1:15; 6:37ab; 10:19; J 8:52; 10:28; 11:26; 13:8; 1 Cor 8:13; Hb 8:12 (Jer 38:34); 13:5; 1 Pt 2:6 (Is 28:16); Rv 2:11; 3:12; 18:21–23 al.—Also in a rhetorical question, when an affirmative answer is expected οὐ μὴ ποιήσῃ τὴν ἐκδίκησιν; will he not vindicate? Lk 18:7. οὐ μὴ πίω αὐτό; shall I not drink it? J 18:11. τίς οὐ μὴ φοβηθῇ; who shall not fear? Rv 15:4.—In relative clauses Mt 16:28; Mk 9:1; Ac 13:41 (Hab 1:5); Ro 4:8 (Ps 31:2); cp. Lk 18:30.—In declarative and interrogative sentences after ὅτι Mt 24:34; Lk 22:16 (οὐκέτι οὐ μή v.l.); J 11:56; without ὅτι Mt 26:29; Lk 13:35.—Combined w. οὐδέ: οὐδʼ οὐ μὴ γένηται (Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 122, 4 [6 A.D.]) Mt 24:21 (B-D-F §431, 3).
    β. w. pres. subj. Hb 13:5 v.l. ἐγκαταλείπω (accepted by Tdf., whereas most edd. read ἐγκαταλίπω)
    ⓑ w. fut. ind. (En 98:12; 99:10; TestAbr A 8 p. 85, 11 [Stone p. 20] οὐ μή σοι ἀκολουθήσω; GrBar 1:7 οὐ μὴ προσθήσω; ApcEsdr 2:7 οὐ μὴ παύσομαι) οὐ μὴ ἔσται σοι τοῦτο Mt 16:22.—Hm 9:5; Hs 1:5; 4:7. Cp. Mt 15:6; 26:35; Lk 10:19 v.l.; 21:33; J 4:14; 6:35b; 10:5 (ἀκολουθήσωσιν v.l.); Hb 10:17. οὐκέτι οὐ μὴ εὑρήσουσιν Rv 18:14. οὐ γὰρ μὴ κληρονομήσει Gal 4:30 (Gen 21:10 v.l.); but the tradition wavers mostly betw. the fut. and aor. subj. (s. Mlt. and B-D-F loc. cit.).—DELG. M-M. EDNT.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > μή

  • 80 προέρχομαι

    προέρχομαι mid. dep.; impf. προηρχόμην; fut. προελεύσομαι; 2 aor. προῆλθον; pf. 3 sg. προελήλυθεν (Just.) (Hdt.+; ins, pap, LXX; TestSol; TestJob 10:3; TestJos 19:3 [8]; EpArist 235 πρ. εἰς=‘go over to’; Philo, Joseph., Just.; Tat. 5, 2; Mel., P. 66, 469; Ath., 10, 3, R. 17 p. 69, 8).
    ① to continue to advance, go forward, advance, proceed w. acc. of degree or way (Pla., Rep. 1, 328e; 10, 616b ὁδόν) μικρόν a little (Plut., Thes. 11, 1; cp. Jos., Vi. 304 πρ. ὀλίγον) Mt 26:39 (v.l. προσελθών); Mk 14:35 (v.l. προσελθών). ῥύμην μίαν go along one lane or go one block farther Ac 12:10. πρ. ὡσεὶ πόδας λ´ Hv 4, 2, 1.—Of time advance, come on (Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 35, 251) τὸ κυρίου πάσχα προέρχεται Dg 12:9.—Of Christ ἵνα εἰς κόσμον προέλθῃ that he might come into this world AcPlCor 2:6.
    ② to precede as leader/guide, go before. W. acc. of pers. (Plut., Brut. 995 [25, 4] ὁ Βροῦτος πολὺ προῆλθε τοὺς κομίζοντας τὸ ἄριστον=Brutus went before the bearers) Ἰούδας προήρχετο αὐτοὺς Lk 22:47 (v.l. αὐτῶν; for the gen. cp. X., Cyr. 2, 2, 7; Jdth 2:19; Just., A I, 23, 1). For Lk 1:17 s. 3.
    ③ to precede so as to be ahead, come/go before someone, go on before or ahead (cp. Sir 32:10) abs. (Herodian 1, 5, 2) Ac 20:5 (v.l. προσελθόντες). πρ. ἐπὶ τὸ πλοῖον go on board the ship beforehand vs. 13 (v.l. προσελθόντες). πρ. εἰς ὑμᾶς go on to you ahead (of me) 2 Cor 9:5. οἱ προελθόντες με ἀπὸ Συρίας εἰς Ῥωμην those who have gone ahead of me from Syria to Rome IRo 10:2.— Arrive at a place before τινά someone προῆλθον αὐτούς Mk 6:33 (vv.ll. προσῆλθον αὐτοῖς et al.). προελεύσεται (v.l. προσελεύσεται) ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ Lk 1:17 (cp. Gen 33:3, 14).
    ④ to come to the fore, come out, proceed (2 Macc 4:34; Philo, Op. M. 161; Jos., Bell. 4, 651; Just., D. 30, 1 al.)
    ⓐ abs. come out of the house (Ps.-Lucian, De Asin. 47; POxy 472, 5 [II A.D.]) Ac 12:13 v.l. (for προσῆλθεν). Of Christ come out (of the womb) GJs 17:3.
    ⓑ come forth, proceed, of Christ’s transcendent origin ἀπό from (πρ. ἀπό as 2 Macc 10:27 v.l.; Just., D. 64, 7 al.) ἀφʼ ἑνὸς πατρός IMg 7:2; ἀπὸ σιγῆς 8:2 (Proclus on Pla., Cratyl. p. 67, 9 Pasqu.: God ἀπʼ ἄλλου προῆλθεν; 100, 6).—M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > προέρχομαι

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

  • before you can say something — before you can say (something) surprisingly quickly. This bow shoots so fast, the arrow is in the target before you can say “gee whiz!” Usage notes: often the word or phrase that follows before you can say is related to the situation you are… …   New idioms dictionary

  • before you can say — (something) surprisingly quickly. This bow shoots so fast, the arrow is in the target before you can say “gee whiz!” Usage notes: often the word or phrase that follows before you can say is related to the situation you are talking about: In… …   New idioms dictionary

  • before you know it — {adv. phr.} Sooner than one would expect. * /Don t despair; we ll be finished with this work before you know it!/ …   Dictionary of American idioms

  • before you know it — {adv. phr.} Sooner than one would expect. * /Don t despair; we ll be finished with this work before you know it!/ …   Dictionary of American idioms

  • before you can blink — spoken phrase very quickly You’ll have spent a hundred pounds before you can blink. Thesaurus: quicklysynonym Main entry: blink * * * before you can blink …   Useful english dictionary

  • before you can say Jack Robinson — before (you) can say Jack Robinson old fashioned if you say that something happens before you can say Jack Robinson, it happens very suddenly. I offered her a chocolate but before you could say Jack Robinson she d eaten half the box …   New idioms dictionary

  • before you can say jack robinson — The term Jack Robinson represents a short amount of time . When you do something before you can say Jack Robinson, you do it very quickly …   The small dictionary of idiomes

  • before you know it — very quickly or soon We ll be there before you know it. The game was over before I knew it. • • • Main Entry: ↑know …   Useful english dictionary

  • before you know where you are — before you know where you ˈare idiom very quickly or suddenly • We were whisked off in a taxi before we knew where we were. Main entry: ↑knowidiom …   Useful english dictionary

  • before you can say knife — (UK) If something happens before you can say knife, it happens very quickly …   The small dictionary of idiomes

  • before you know it — before (you) know it surprisingly quickly. I saw a rabbit in the field, but it was gone before I knew it …   New idioms dictionary

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»